Code 2021 Sept 15 Ingles

International Gymnastics Federation
FONDÉE EN 1881
2021 CODE OF POINTS

MEN’S ARTISTIC GYMNASTICS
For men’s artistic gymnastics competitions at
World Championships
Olympic Games
Regional and Intercontinental Competitions
Events with international participants
In competitions for nations with lower level of gymnastics

development, as well as for Junior Competitions, modified
competition rules should be appropriately designed by continental
or regional technical authorities, as indicated by the age and level
of development (see the FIG Age Group Development Program)
The Code of Points is the property of the FIG. Translation and

copying are prohibited without prior written approval by FIG. In
case any statement contained herein is in conflict with the Techni-
cal Regulations, the Technical Regulations shall take precedence.
Where there is a difference among the languages, the English text
shall be considered correct.
Code MAG 2021

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
President Arturs Mickevics LAT
1st Vice-president Andrew Tombs GBR
2nd Vice-president Julio Marcos Felipe ESP
Member Holger Albrecht GER
Member Jeff Thomson CAN
Member Hiroyuki Tomita JPN
Member Huang Liping CHN
Athletes’ Representative Aljaz Pegan SLO
Illustrations Koichi Endo JPN

Tomomasa Makita JPN
Symbols Andrew Tombs GBR
English version Adrian Stoica ROU
Hardy Fink CAN
Steve Butcher USA
French version Adrian Stoica ROU
Jean Francois Blanquino FRA
Yves Bertinchamps BEL
Bruno Martin CAN
Spanish translation and text Julio Marcos ESP
Elaboration and layout Julio Marcos ESP
ABBREVIATIONS
MTC - Men’s Technical Committee
OG - Olympic Games
WC - World Championships
TR - Technical Regulations
COP - Code of Points
FX - Floor Exercise
PH - Pommel Horse
SR - Rings
VT - Vault
PB - Parallel Bars
HB - Horizontal Bar
DV - Difficulty Value(s) A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, etc...
CV - Connection Value
EG - Element Group Requirements
Code MAG 2021 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART I - REGULATIONS GOVERNING COMPETITION
PARTICIPANTS
Section 1 - Purpose
Section 2 - Regulations governing Gymnasts
Article 2.1 - Rights of Gymnasts
Article 2.2 - Responsibilities of the Gymnast
Article 2.3 - Duties of the Gymnast
Article 2.4 - Penalties
Article 2.5 - Gymnast Oath
Section 3 - Regulations for coaches
Article 3.1 - Rights of the Coaches
Article 3.2 - Responsibilities of the Coaches
Article 3.3 - Penalties
Article 3.4 - Inquiries
Article 3.5 - Coaches’ Oath
Section 4 - Regulations for Technical Committee
Article 4.1 - The President of the MTC
Article 4.2 - MTC Members
Section 5 - Regulations and structure of apparatus juries
Article 5.1 - Responsibilities
Article 5.2 - Rights
Article 5.3 - Composition of the Apparatus Jury
Article 5.4 - Functions of the Apparatus Jury
Article 5.5 - Functions of Timers, Line judges, and Secretaries
Article 5.6 - Seating Arrangements

Article 5.7 - Judges’ Oath
Article 5.8 - Naming of New elements
PART II - EVALUATION OF THE EXERCISES
Section 6 - Evaluation of the Competition Exercises

Article 6.1 - General Rules
Article 6.2 - Determination of the Final Score
Section 7 - Regulations governing the D Score
Article 7.1 - Difficulty
Article 7.2 - Element Groups and Dismount Requirements
Article 7.3 - Connection Points
Article 7.4 - Evaluation by the D Jury
Article 7.5 - Repetition
Article 7.6 - D jury evaluation table
Section 8 - Regulations governing the E Score
Article 8.1 - Description of exercise presentation
Article 8.2 - Calculation of E Jury deductions
Article 8.3 - Instructions for the gymnasts
Code MAG 2021 3

Section 9 - Technical Directives
Article 9.1 - Evaluation by the E jury
Article 9.2 - Determination of execution and technical errors
Article 9.3 - Expectations for exercise construction
Article 9.4 - E jury deductions
PART III - Apparatus

Section 10 - Floor Exercise
Article 10.1 - Exercise description
Article 10.2 - Content and Construction
Article 10.3 - Specific Apparatus deductions
Article 10.4 - Table of Elements
Section 11 - Pommel Horse
Section 12 - Rings
Section 13 - Vault
Section 14 - Parallel Bars
Section 15 - Horizontal Bar
PART IV - Appendices
A. Additional Explanations and interpretations

Code MAG 2021 4

PART I
Regulations Governing Competition Participants
Section 1
Purpose
Article 1
The primary purpose of the Code of Points is to:
1. Provide an objective means of evaluating gymnastics exercises
at all levels of regional, national, and international competitions.
2. Standardize the judging of the four phases of FIG official com-

petitions: Qualification Team Finals, All Around and Apparatus
Finals.
3. Assure the identification of the best gymnast in any competi-
tion.
4. Guide coaches and gymnasts in the composition of competition
exercises.
5. Provide information about the source of other technical infor-
mation and regulations frequently needed at competitions by
judges, coaches, and gymnasts.
Section 2
Regulations governing gymnasts
Article 2.1 Rights of gymnasts

General
The gymnast is guaranteed the right to:
a) Have their performance judged correctly, fairly, and in accord-
ance with the stipulations of the Code of Points.
b) Receive in writing the evaluation of the difficulty rating for a
submitted new vault or element within a reasonable time prior
to the start of the competition.
c) Have their score publicly displayed immediately following his
performance or in accordance with the specific regulations
governing that competition.
d) Repeat their entire exercise, if the exercise has been inter-
rupted for reasons beyond his control or responsibility with
permission of the Superior Jury.
e) Briefly leave the competition hall for personal reasons and that
such a request not be unreasonably denied with permission
from the Chair of the Superior Jury.
NOTE: The competition may not be delayed through his ab-
sence.
f) Receive through their delegation leader the correct result
output, showing all his scores received in the competition.
Apparatus
The gymnast is guaranteed the right to:
a) Have identical apparatus and mats in the training halls, warm-
up hall and on the competition podium that conforms to the
specifications and norms for FIG official competitions.
Code MAG 2021 5

b) Use of mandatory additional 10 cm soft mats on top of the exist-
ing basic landing mats (20 cm) for Rings, Vault and Horizontal
Bar.
c) Be assisted to the hanging position by a coach or gymnast for
the start of their exercise on Rings and Horizontal Bar.
d) Have one spotter present at Rings and Horizontal Bar.
e) Rest or recuperate in the allowable time following a fall from
the apparatus.
f) Confer with their coach during the allowable time available to
him following a fall from the apparatus and between the first
and second vaults.
g) Request permission to raise the Horizontal Bar and/or Rings
to accommodate their height.
h) Repeat the entire exercise (Rings or Horizontal Bar only)
without deduction at the end of the rotation with approval by
the D-jury, if the gymnast shows a significantly torn handguard
(grip) causing a fall or exercise interruption.
Warm-up
In Qualifying, All Around Final and Team Final·
- Each competing gymnast (including substitute of injured gym-
nast) is entitled to a touch warm-up period immediately prior to
the competition on the podium on all apparatus in accordance
with the Technical Regulations that govern that competition:
- 30 sec. on all apparatus except Parallel Bar
- 50 sec. on Parallel Bars, including bar preparation
NOTE:
- In Qualifying and Team Final the entire warm-up time belongs
to the team. The team must pay attention to the time elapsed
so that the last gymnast receives a warm-up.
- In mixed-groups the warm-up time belongs personally to the
gymnast. The order of warm up should be the same as the
order of competition.
- The end of the warm-up period is signaled by an audible signal.
If a gymnast is mentally and physically prepared to vault or is still
on the apparatus at that time, they may complete the element or
sequence started. Following the warm-up period or during the
“competition pause”, the apparatus may be prepared, but
not used.
- Timing related to all exercises (start of exercise & exercise
duration) will be done in 1 second increments.
- There will be a conspicuous signal from the D1 judge (at of-
ficial FIG competitions, a green light) 30 seconds before their
exercise is expected to begin.
Article 2.2 Responsibilities of the gymnast

a) To know the Code of Points and conduct himself accordingly.
b) To submit, or have their coach submit, a written request at least
24 hours before podium training to the Chair of the Superior
Jury to assess the difficulty of a new element.
c) To submit, or have their coach submit, a written request at least
24 hours before podium training to the Chair of the Superior
Jury to raise the Horizontal Bar and/or Rings; or to submit
Code MAG 2021 6

such requests in accordance with the Technical Regulations
that govern that competition.
Article 2.3 Duties of the gymnast

General
a) To present himself raising 1 or 2 arms and thereby acknowl-
edge the D1 judge at the commencement of his exercise and to
acknowledge the same judge at the conclusion of his exercise.
b) To begin the exercise within 30 seconds of the green light or
signal from D1 (on all apparatus).
c) To remount within 30 seconds after a fall (the timing starts
when the gymnast is on his feet after the fall). In this time the
gymnast can recuperate, re - chalk, confer with his coach and
remount. If a gymnast intentionally remains off of his feet, in
order to avoid the 30 second fall clock (resting, adjusting grips,
receiving chalk from coach, delaying the competition without
justification, etc.), then the following rule may be applied from
Article 2.4.e: “Other undisciplined or abusive behaviour – 0.3
from the Final Score by the D1 Judge”
d) To leave the podium immediately after the conclusion of their
exercise.
e) To refrain from changing the height of any apparatus, unless
permission has been granted.
f) To refrain from speaking with active judges during the competi-
tion.
g) To refrain from delaying the competition, remaining on the
podium for too long, remounting the podium on completion of
his exercise, and from otherwise abusing his rights or infringing
on those of any other participant.
h) To refrain from any other undisciplined or abusive behavior
or infringing on those of any other participant (i.e. marking
the floor carpet with magnesium, damaging any apparatus
surface or parts during preparation for his exercise or removing
springs from the spring board. These violations will be treated
as apparatus related violations, and will be deducted as large
errors with 0.5 points).
i) To notify the Superior Jury, if a necessity arises to leave the
competition hall. The Competition may not be delayed through
his absence.
j) To leave the supplementary mats in position (for landing) during
the entire exercise.
k) To participate in the respective Award Ceremony dressed in
competition attire according to FIG Protocol.
Competition Attire
a) They must wear long gymnastics pants and socks on Pom-
mel Horse, Rings, Parallel Bars, and Horizontal Bar. Long
gymnastics pants, socks and/or slippers that are black or the
darker shades of blue, brown or green are not permitted.
b) They have the option of wearing short pants with or without
socks or long gymnastics pants with socks on Floor Exercise
and Vault.
Code MAG 2021 7

c) The wearing of a gymnastics singlet on all apparatus is com-
pulsory.
d) They have the option of wearing of gymnastic footwear and /
or socks.
e) They must wear the bib number supplied by the organizing
committee.
f) They must wear a national identification or emblem on their
singlet in accordance with the most recent FIG Publicity Rules.
g) They must wear only those logos, advertising and sponsorship
identifiers that are permitted in the most recent FIG Publicity
Rules.
h) The competition attire must be identical for members from the
same federation in the Qualification and Team Final Competi-
tions. In the Qualification individual gymnasts from the same
federation (without a team) may wear different competition
attire.
i) Gymnast must refrain from wearing compression sleeves dur-
ing competition. Handguards, body bandages, and wrist wraps
are permitted; they must be securely fastened, in good repair
and should not detract from the aesthetics of the performance.
Skin-colored bandages are recommended.
Articles 2.4 Penalties

a) The normal penalty for a violation of the rules and expectations
presented in Article 2 and Article 3 are considered medium
errors of 0.30 points for behavioral violations and large errors
of 0.50 points for apparatus related violations.
b) A few other possibilities for penalties also exist and these are
outlined below.
c) Unless otherwise indicated these penalties are always applied
by the D1 judge to the Final Score for that exercise.
d) In extreme cases, the gymnast or coach may be expelled
from the competition hall in addition to suffering the specified
penalty.
e) Violations and the associated penalties are:
Code MAG 2021 8

Violation Penalty
Behaviour Related Violations
Any attire violations (Art. 2.3).
0.30 from the Final Score (once for
a competition session) Applied by
the Chair of the Superior Jury.
Non respect of the official warm up 0.30 from the Final Score by the
time. D1 judge.
Not acknowledging the D1 judge 0.30 for each time from the Final
before or after the exercise. Score by the D1 judge.
Exceeding 30 sec. before com- 0.30 from the Final Score by the
mencing exercise. D1 judge.
Exceeding 60 sec. before com-
Exercise is terminated.
mencing exercise.
Exceeding 30 sec. before continu- 0.30 from the Final Score by the
ing after a fall. D1 judge.
Exceeding 60 sec. before continu-
Exercise is terminated at the fall
ing after a fall.
Remounting podium after the ex- 0.30 from the Final Score by the
ercise. D1 judge.
Other undisciplined or abusive be- 0.30 from the Final Score by the
haviour. D1 judge.
Apparatus Related Violations
Non-permitted presence of spotter. 0.50 from the Final Score by the
D1 judge.
Incorrect use of magnesium and/or 0.50 from the Final Score by the
damaging apparatus. D1 judge.
Illegal use of supplementary mats
0.50 from the Final Score by the
or non-use where required.
D1 judge.
Coach moving supplementary mats 0.50 from the Final Score by the
during the exercise. D1 judge.
Changing the height of the appara- 0.50 from the Final Score by the
tus without permission. D1 judge.
Re-arrangement or removal of 0.50 from the Final Score by the
springs from the springboard. D1 judge.
Other Individual Violations
Absent from the competition area Disqualification from remainder of
without permission failure to return competition (By the Chair of the
and complete the competition. Superior Jury).
Absent from Victory Ceremony.
Result and Final Score is annulled
for team and individual purposes
(By Superior Jury).
Performing without signal or green

light. Final Score = 0 points.
Code MAG 2021 9

Team Violations
Team gymnast(s) compete in wrong 1,0 from the Total Team Score on
order on an apparatus. the applicable apparatus (By Chair
of the Superior Jury).
Non respect of the official warm up
1.00 from team score each time (By
time.
Chair of the Superior Jury
Violations of attire regulations that 1,0 from the Total Team Score,
apply to Team Competition. once per competition, applied by
the Chair of the Superior Jury.
Article 2.5 Gymnasts’ Oath

“In the name of all gymnasts, I promise that we shall take part in this
World Championships (or any other official FIG Event) respecting
and abiding by the rules which govern them, committing ourselves
to a sport without doping and without drugs, in the true spirit of
sportsmanship, for the glory of sport and the honour of the gymnasts.”
Section 3
Regulations for coaches
Article 3.1 Rights of the Coaches

The coach is guaranteed the right to:
a) Assist the gymnast or team under his care in submitting written
requests related to the raising of apparatus and the rating of
a new vault or element.
b) Assist the gymnast or team under their care on the podium
during the warm up period on all apparatus.
c) Help the gymnast or team prepare the apparatus for com-
petition. Preparation of any apparatus may be performed by
coaches for the upcoming rotation upon completion of the
final exercise in the current rotation and publication of the last
gymnast’s score.
d) Lift the gymnast to a hanging position on the Rings and Hori-
zontal Bar.
e) Be present on the podium after the green light is lit to remove
the springboard on - Parallel Bars.
f) Be present at Rings and Horizontal Bar during the gymnast’s
exercise for reasons of safety.
g) Assist or advise the gymnast during the thirty seconds after a
fall on all apparatus and between the first and second vault.
h) Have their gymnast’s score publicly displayed immediately
following their performance or in accordance with the specific
regulations governing that competition.
i) Be present at all apparatus to help in case of injuries or defects
of the apparatus.
j) Inquire to Superior Jury concerning the evaluation of the
content of the exercise of the gymnast (see Art. 3.4).
k) Request to Superior Jury a review of the Time and Line deduc-
tions.
Code MAG 2021 10

Article 3.2 Responsibilities of the Coaches to:
a) Know the Code of Points and conduct himself accordingly.
b) Submit the competition order and other information required in
accordance with the Code of Points and/or the FIG Technical
Regulations that govern that competition.
c) Refrain from changing the height of any apparatus or adding,
rearranging or removing springs from the springboard.
d) Refrain from delaying the competition, obstructing the view of
the judges and from otherwise abusing or interfering with the
rights of any other participant.
e) Refrain from speaking to the gymnast or from assisting in any
other way (give signals, shouts, cheers or similar) during his
performance.
f) Refrain from engaging in discussions with active judges and/
or other persons outside of the inner arena circle during the
competition (exception: team doctor, delegation leader).
g) Refrain from any other undisciplined or abusive behavior.
h) Conduct themselves in a fair and sportsmanlike manner at all
times during the competition.
i) Participate in a sportsmanlike manner in any applicable Award
Ceremony.
NOTE: See Deductions for Violations and Unsportsmanlike Behavior.
Number of Coaches Permitted in the Inner Circle:

Qualifying and Team Final Competitions
- Complete teams 1 or 2 coaches
- Nations with individuals 1 coach
All - Around Competition and Apparatus Finals
Competition for
- Each gymnast 1 coach
Article 3.3 Penalties

Behavior of coach
By Chair of Superior Jury (In For FIG Official and Registered
Consultation with Superior Jury) Competitions
Behavior of Coach with no direct impact on the result/performance

of the gymnast/team
Unsportsmanlike conduct (valid for 1st time –Yellow card for coach
all phases of the competition). (warning).
2nd time –Red card for coach and
removal of coach from the competi-
tion.*
Other flagrant, undisciplined and Immediate Red card for coach and
abusive behaviour (valid for all removal of coach from the competi-
phases of the competition). tion.*
Code MAG 2021 11

Behaviour of Coach with direct impact on the result/performance of
the gymnast/team
Unsportsmanlike conduct, i.e. un- 1st time – 0.50 (from gymnast/team
excused delay or interruption of at event) and Yellow card for coach
competition, speaking to active (warning) if coach speaks to active
judges during the competition ex- judges.
cept to D1 - Judge (inquiry only
permitted), speaking directly to the 1st time – 1.00 (from gymnast/team
gymnast, by giving signals, shouts at event) and Yellow card for coach
(cheers) or similar during the exer- (warning) if coach speaks aggres-
cise, etc. sively to active judges.
2nd time – 1.00 (from gymnast/team

at event), Red card for coach and
removal of coach from the competi-
tion floor.*
Other flagrant, undisciplined and – 1.00 (from gymnast/team at

abusive behaviour, i.e. incorrect event), immediate Red card for
presence of unauthorized persons coach and removal of coach from
in inner circle during competition, the competition floor.*
etc.
Note: If one of two coaches from a team is dismissed from the com-
petition inner circle, it is possible to replace that coach with another
coach one time during the entire competition.
1st offense = yellow card.
2nd offense = red card, at which time the coach is excluded from
the rest of the competition phases.
* if there is only one coach, then the coach would remain in the
competition but would not be eligible for accreditation at the
next World Championships, Olympic Games.
Article 3.4 Inquiries

Please refer to TR (Technical Regulations).
Article 3.5 Coaches’ Oath

“In the name of all Coaches and other members of the athlete’s
entourage, I promise that we shall commit ourselves to ensuring
that the spirit of sportsmanship and ethics is fully adhered to and
upheld in accordance with the fundamental principles of Olympism.
We shall commit ourselves to educating the gymnasts to adhere to
fair play and drug free sport and to respect all FIG Rules governing
the World Championships.”
Code MAG 2021 12

Section 4
Regulations for the Technical Committee
Article 4.1 The President of the MTC

The President of the Men’s Technical Committee or his representa-
tive will serve as Chair of the Superior Jury. Their responsibilities and
those of the Superior Jury include:
a) The overall Technical Direction of the competition as outlined
in the Technical Regulations.
b) To call and chair all judges’ meetings and instruction sessions.
c) To apply the stipulations of the Judges’ Regulations applying
to that competition.
d) To deal with requests for evaluation of new elements, raising
the Horizontal Bar and/or Rings, leaving the competition area,
and other issues that may arise. Such decisions are normally
made by the Men’s Technical Committee.
e) To make sure that the time schedule published in the Work
plan is respected.
f) To control the work of the Apparatus Supervisors and intervene
if deemed necessary. Except in case of an inquiry, time or line
errors, generally no change of score is allowed after the score
has been flashed on the score board.
g) To deal with inquiries as outlined herein.
h) In cooperation with the members of the Superior Jury, to issue
warnings to or replace any person acting in any judging capac-
ity who is considered to be unsatisfactory or to have broken
their oath.
i) To conduct a global video analysis (post competition) with the
TC to determine errors in judgment and to submit the results
of the Judges evaluation to the FIG Disciplinary Commission.
j) To supervise the checking of the apparatus measurement
specifications according to the FIG Apparatus Norms.
k) In unusual or special circumstances may nominate a judge to
the competition.
l) To submit a report to the FIG Executive Committee, which must
be sent to the FIG Secretary General as soon as possible,
but no later than 30 days after the event, which contains the
following:
· General remarks about the competition including special
occurrences and conclusions for the future.
· Detailed analyses of the judges’ performance including
proposals for rewarding the best judges and sanctions
against the judges who fail to meet expectations within 3
months.
· Detailed list of all interventions (score changes before
and after publication).
· Technical analyses of the D-judges’ scores.
Article 4.2 The MTC Members

During each phase of the competition, the members of the Men’s
Technical Committee or their representatives will serve as members
of the Superior Jury and Apparatus Supervisors for each apparatus.
Code MAG 2021 13

Their responsibilities include:
a) To participate in the direction of the judges’ meetings and in-
struction sessions and guide the judges to perform the correct
work on their respective apparatus.
b) To apply the Judges’ Regulations control with fairness, con-
sistency and completely in accordance with the currently valid
regulations and criteria.
c) To record the entire exercise content in symbol notation.
d) To calculate the D and E Score (control scores) for the purpose
of evaluation of the D, R and E Panels.
e) To control the total evaluation and the final score for each exercise.
f) To check the apparatus used at training, warm-up and competi-
tion with the FIG Apparatus Norms.
Section 5
Regulations and Structure of apparatus Juries
Article 5.1 Responsibilities

Every judge is fully and solely responsible for their own scores.
All members of the Apparatus Juries have the responsibility to:
a) Have thorough knowledge of:
- the FIG Technical Regulations,
- the Code of Points,
- the FIG Judges’ Rules,
- any other technical information necessary to carry out
their duties during a competition.
b) Be in possession of the international Judge’s Brevet valid for
the current Cycle and produce the Judge’s Log Book.
c) Possess the Category necessary for the level of competition
they are judging.
d) Have extensive knowledge in contemporary gymnastics and to
understand the intent, purpose, interpretation, and application
of each rule.
e) Attend all scheduled instruction sessions and meetings of
judges before the respective Competition (extraordinary ex-
ceptions, which were unavoidable, will actually be decided by
the FIG MTC).
f) Adhere to any special organisational or judging related instruc-
tion given by the governing authorities (i.e. Scoring system
instructions).
g) Participation in podium training is mandatory for all judges.
h) Be prepared thoroughly on all apparatus
i) Be capable of fulfilling the various necessary mechanical du-
ties, which include:
- Correctly completing any required score sheets.
- Using any necessary computer or mechanical equipment.
- Facilitating the efficient running of the competition.
- Communicating effectively with other judges
j) Be well prepared, rested, vigilant, and punctually present at
least one hour before the start of competition or according to
the instructions from the Work plan.
Code MAG 2021 14

k) Wear the FIG prescribed competition uniform (dark blue jacket,
grey trousers dark blue suit, light coloured white shirt with tie),
except at the OG, where the uniform is supplied by the Organ-
izing Committee.
During the competition judges must:
a) Behave at all times in a professional manner and exemplify
non-partisan ethical behaviour.
b) Fulfill the functions outlined as specified in Article 5.4
c) Evaluate each exercise accurately, consistently, quickly, objec-
tively and fairly; when in doubt, give the benefit of that doubt
to the gymnast.
d) Maintain a record of their personal scores.
e) Remain in own assigned seat (except with the consent of D1
Judge) and refrain from having contact or discussions with
gymnasts, coaches, delegation leaders or other judges.
Penalties for inappropriate evaluation and behaviour by judges
will be in accordance with the current version of the FIG Judges’
Rules and/or the TR that apply to that competition.
Article 5.2 Rights

In case of an intervention by the Superior Jury, the Judge has the
right to explain their score and to agree (or not) to a change. In
case of disagreement the Judge may be overruled by the Superior
Jury and shall be informed accordingly.
In case of arbitrary action taken against a judge, they have the
right to file an appeal:
a) to the Superior Jury, if the action was initiated by the Apparatus
Supervisor or
b) to the Jury of Appeal, if the action was initiated by the Superior Jury.
Article 5.3 Composition of the Apparatus Jury

The Apparatus Jury (Judges’ Panels)
For the official FIG Competitions, World Championships and
Olympic Games, the Apparatus Jury will consist of a D-Panel and
an E-Panel.
- The D Judges are drawn and appointed by the FIG Technical
Committee in accordance with the most current FIG Technical
Regulations
- E- Judging Panels and supplementary positions will be drawn
under the authority of the TC in accordance with the current
Technical Regulations or Judges’ Rules that govern that com-
petition.
- R-Judges are appointed by the FIG Presidential commission.
The structure of the Apparatus Jury for the various types of com-
petitions should be as follows:
Code MAG 2021 15

WC and OG International Invitational
9 Judge Panel Minimum 6 Judge Panel

2 D - Panel Judges 2 D - Panel Judges
5 7 E - Panel Judges 4 E - Panel Judges
2 R - Panel Judges (Recommended)

Line and Time judges:
- 2 line judges for Floor Exercise,
- 1 line judge for Vault,
- 1 time keeper for Floor Exercise,
- 1 time keeper Parallel Bars warm up time.
Modifications to the Judges’ Panels are possible for other interna-
tional competitions and for national and local competitions.
Article 5.4 Function of the Apparatus Jury

Article 5.4.1 Functions of the D - Panel
a) D- Panel Judges record the entire exercise content in symbol
notation, evaluate independently, without bias and then jointly
determine the D score content. Discussion is allowed.
b) The D-Panel enters the D- score into the computer.
c) The D-score content includes:
- The value of elements (difficulty value) according to the
table of elements.
- The connections value, based on special rules for each
apparatus.
- The number and the value of Element Group Require-
ments executed.
Function of The D1 judge:
a) To serve as liaison between the Apparatus Jury and the Ap-
paratus Supervisor. The Apparatus Supervisor will then consult
when necessary with the Superior Jury.
b) To coordinate the work of the Time Judges, Line Judges and
Secretaries.
c) To ensure the efficient running of the apparatus including the
control of warm up time.
d) To display the green light or other conspicuous signal to no-
tify the gymnasts they must begin their exercise within thirty
seconds.
e) To ensure that neutral deductions for time, line, behaviour
faults are taken from the Final Score before being flashed.
f) To ensure the correct penalties for a short exercise are applied.
g) To ensure the following deductions are applied for:
- Failure to present before and after the exercise.
- Performance of an invalid “0” vault.
- Assistance during the: Vault, Exercise and Dismounts.
Function the D- Panel After the Competition:
Will submit a written competition report, as directed by the TC
President with the following information:
- Forms listing violations, ambiguities and questionable deci-
Code MAG 2021 16

sions with the number and name of the gymnast.
- The content of all exercises to the President of the Men’s
Technical Committee and the Apparatus Supervisor in the
Superior Jury in one of the official FIG languages within 2
months weeks of the competition.
Article 5.4.2 Functions of the E - Panel

a) They must observe the exercises attentively, evaluate the
faults and apply the corresponding deductions correctly, in-
dependently and without consulting the other judges.
b) They must record the deductions for:
- General Faults.
- Technical compositional errors.
- Positional Errors.
c) They must complete the score slip with a legible signature or
enter their deductions into the computer.
d) They must be able to provide a personal written record of their
evaluation of all exercises.
Article 5.4.3 Function of the Reference Judges

The Reference Judges (2 by apparatus) for Olympic Games and
World Championships were introduced to have an automatic and time
saving correction system in case of problems with Execution scores.
Other competitions may use Reference judges but are not obliged.
Article 5.5 Functions of the Timers, Line Judges and Secretaries

Article 5.5.1 The Timers and Line Judges
The Timers and Line Judges are drawn from among the Brevet
judges to serve as:
Line judges to:
- Determine on Floor and VT stepping outside of the border
marking and to acknowledge the fault by raising a red flag.
- Inform the D1 judge of any violation and deduction and sign
and submit the appropriate written record.
Time judges are required to:
- Time the duration of the exercise (FX).
- Ensure adherence to the warm-up time on PB.
- On FX give an audible signal to the gymnast at completion of
605 and 705 seconds.
- Inform the D1 judge of any violation and deduction and sign
and submit the appropriate written record.
- For time violations where there is no computer input, the time
judge must record the exact amount of time over the time limit.
Article 5.5.2 Functions of the Secretaries

The Secretaries need to have COP and computer knowledge. They
are usually appointed by the Organizing Committee. Under the su-
pervision of the D1 Judge, they are responsible for the accuracy of
all entries into the computers:
- Adherence to the correct order of the teams and gymnasts.
- Operating the green and red lights.
Code MAG 2021 17

- Correct flashing of the Final Score.
- Time the duration of the fall period.
- Control the start of the exercise after the green light is lit.
Article 5.6 Seating Arrangements

The judges will be seated at a location and distance from the ap-
paratus which permits an unobstructed view of the total performance
and which permits them to fulfill all of their evaluation duties.
- D- Panel Judges must be in line with the centre of the apparatus.
- The timer sits by the Apparatus Jury (either side).
- The line judges at FX must sit at opposite corners and observe
the 2 lines closest to them.
- The line judge at Vault must sit at the far end of the landing
area.
- The placement of the E- jury will be clockwise around the ap-
paratus beginning from the left of the D- Panel, or judges are
placed in a straight line the D2, E1 and E2 will be seated to
the left of the D1 in that order and Secretary, E5, E4 and E3
will sit to the right in that order.
Variations in the seating arrangement are possible depending on

the conditions available in the competition hall.
Article 5.7 Judge’s Oath (TR 7.12)

At the World Championships, and other important international
events, juries and judges pledge to respect the terms of the Judges’
Oath:
“In the name of all the judges and officials, I promise that we shall
officiate in these World Championships (or any other official FIG
Event) with complete impartiality, respecting and abiding by the rules
which govern them, in the true spirit of sportsmanship.”
Article 5.8 MAG Naming of New Elements

Any new element performed at an FIG registered competition with an
official FIG TD or FIG MTC member participating, in an accredited
role and in attendance during the performance, is eligible for new
element recognition in the Code of Points. A video of the completed
element must be given to the TC member in attendance for later
review and evaluation at the following MTC meeting.
Code MAG 2021 18

• Performed internationally for the first time at an official FIG Group
1, 2 or 3 competition (with or without an official FIG TD present)
or at a FIG Group 4 competition with an official FIG TD present.
• C value or higher and performed for value
• Difficulty value and name will only be confirmed following a TC
analysis of the performance
• If more than one gymnast at the same competition performs the
same new element, the element will be named after all gymnasts.
• The Federation of the gymnast has the responsibility to submit a
video of the proposed new element to the FIG TC President as
soon as possible after the competition. In addition, the competi-
tion TD must submit the official video, original video and drawing
submitted by the coach (if available), and all details about the
provisional evaluation given at the competition, to the FIG TC
President as soon as possible.
Code MAG 2021 19

PART II
Evaluation of exercises
Section 6
The Evaluation of Competition Exercises
Article 6.1 General Rules

1. Two separates scores, “D” and “E”, will be calculated on all ap-
paratus.
- The D-jury determine the “D” score, the content of an exercise,
and the E-jury the “E” score, i.e. the exercise presentation
related to compositional requirements, technique and body
position.
- “D” score content will include by addition:
- The additional difficulty value of 10 elements (8 for jun-
iors), the best 9 (7 for juniors), but maximum 5 elements
for the same Element Group, inside the best counting
plus the value of the dismount. If the judge needs to
choose the counting 9 (7 for juniors) elements from
elements which have the same value but belong to dif-
ferent Element Groups, he must determine them to the
benefit of the gymnast. Once the 9 (7 for juniors) best
counting elements plus the dismount of the exercise are
determined, the judge must count among them not more
than 5 elements from the same element group (for FX,
the Element Group of the dismount will count first).
Example 1:
I III I II III III III III I II IV
A B B B B B B C C C D
B B B B B B C C C D
Example 2:
III III I II II II III III III III I IV
B B B B B B B D D D D D
B B B B B D D D D D
In bold letters counting elements.
- The connections value, based on special rules on different

apparatus.
- Element Group Requirements Value, performed among
the 10 counting elements (8 for juniors).
- “E” score, will start from 10 points and will evaluate by deduc-
tions applied in tenths of a point:
- The total deductions for aesthetic and execution errors.
- The total deductions for technical and compositional er-
rors.
- The highest and the lowest sums of total deductions applied
in tenths of a point for execution, aesthetic, technical and
compositional errors are eliminated. The average remaining
sums is subtracted from the 10 points in order to determine
the Final “E” Score.
Code MAG 2021 20

Article 6.2 - Determination of the Final Score
1. The Final Score of an exercise will be established by the addition
of the “D” and final “E” scores.
2. The rules governing the evaluation of the exercises and the deter-
mination of the Final Score are identical for all sessions of optional
competition (Qualification, Team Final, All Around Final, Apparatus
Finals) except for Vault, where special rules in Qualification and in
Apparatus Finals apply (see Section 13).
3. The All-Around Score is the sum of the Final Scores obtained on
the six exercises.
4. The Team Score is calculated in accordance with the current
Technical Regulations that govern that competition.
5. Qualification for, and participation in, the Team Final, the All Around
Final, and the Apparatus Finals will occur in accordance with the
current Technical Regulations that govern that competition.
6. The Final Score is normally calculated by the competition scoring
personnel but must be confirmed by the Apparatus Supervisor
before it is displayed.
7. At official FIG competitions, the single “D” score from the D-jury
and the “E” score (the average of exercise presentation deductions
subtracted from 10 from each judge of the E-jury) will be displayed.
Each individual score of the E-jury will appear on the main results
form. At all other competitions, the “D” score, “E” score and the
Final Score must be displayed.
Article 6.3 - Short exercise

For exercise presentation, the gymnast may earn a maximum
E- Score of 10.00 points.
The D -Panel will take the appropriate neutral deduction (penalty)
for a short exercise from the Final Score.
• 7 or more elements - 0.0 points

• 5 - 6 elements - 4.0 points
• 3 - 4 elements - 6.0 points
• 1 to 2 elements - 8.0 points
• No elements - 10.0 points
Section 7
Regulations Governing the D score (DV)
Article 7.1 Difficulty

1. On Floor Exercise, Pommel Horse, Rings, Parallel Bars, and
Horizontal Bar, the following difficulty values will count in all com-
petitions:
Values A B C D E F G H I
parts
Value 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90
2. To the extent possible, only single elements are included in the
Difficulty Tables. Each element is given a unique difficulty value
and a unique Code Identification Number.
3. Elements that are not listed in the Difficulty Tables must be sub-
Code MAG 2021 21

mitted for a difficulty rating to the Chair of the Superior Jury 24
hours in advance of podium training at official FIG Competitions.
Provisional difficulty ratings may be given by Technical Authorities
at other international, national, and local competitions.
4. An element (or element with the same Code Identification Number)
may be repeated but such repeated element may not contribute
towards the “D” score. See additional regulations restricting repeti-
tion for Pommel Horse and Rings in Section 11 and 12.
5. Elements that no longer appear in the Code are usually not permit-
ted or fall below the value of an A.
6. Elements in same box with different values may be performed in
the same exercise with both elements contributing to the “D” Score.
Article 7.2 Element Group and Dismount Requirements

1. With this evaluation category, the judge evaluates those required
movement patterns which, in addition to the gymnast’s personal
inclinations and technical abilities, are intended to enhance the
variety of movement in the construction of an exercise.
2. Each apparatus has three Element Groups designated as I, II, III,
and, except for Floor Exercise, a Dismount Group designated as
IV.
3. In his exercise, the gymnast must include at least one element
from each of the three Element Groups.
4. An element may meet the Element Group requirement only for the
Element Group under which it is located in the Difficulty Tables.
5. Each Element Group requirement fulfillment (inside the 10 counting
elements) is awarded with 0.5 points by the D-jury.
6. Every exercise must end with a legitimate dismount listed under
the Dismount Element Group. (see Section 10 and 13 for specific
regulations for Floor Exercise and Vault). Non-legitimate dismounts
include:
i. A dismount that pushes off the feet (except on Floor Exercise).
ii. An exercise finished with a partially shown or incomplete
dismount. TBD
iii. A dismount that does not land on the feet (including rollout
elements on Floor Exercise).
iv. A dismount that intentionally lands sideways.
NB. Such elements always lead to non-recognition by the D-jury

of the element and the Element Group.
7. Regarding Dismount element group requirements, the following
rule will be applied:
- A or B value dismount 0.00 p. (does not fulfill requirement).
- C value dismount +0.30 p. (partial requirement value).
- D or higher value +0.50 p. (full requirement value).
For juniors:
- A value dismount 0.00 p. (does not fulfill requirement).
- B value dismount +0.30 p. (partial requirement value).
- C or higher value +0.50 p. (full requirement value).
Code MAG 2021 22

Article 7.3 Connection Points
1. This evaluation factor provides the D-jury with the possibility of
awarding special connections. Thereby, these connection points
better serve to differentiate the exercises which contain special
connections between elements, as particularly described on each
apparatus.
2. Connection Points may be awarded only for directly connected
recognized high valued elements performed without a large error.
Article 7.4 Evaluation by the D-jury

1. The D-jury is responsible for evaluating the content of the exer-
cise and determining the correct “D” score on each apparatus as
defined in Sections 10 to 15. Except in the circumstances defined
in Article 7.4 the D-jury is obligated to recognize and credit each
legal element that is correctly performed.
2. The gymnast is expected to include in his exercise only elements
that he can perform with complete safety and with a high degree of
aesthetic and technical mastery. Very poorly performed elements
will not be recognized by the D-jury and will be deducted by the
E-jury.
3. Each element is defined to the perfect end position or as being
performed with perfection.
4. An element that is not recognized by the D-jury will receive no
value.
5. An element will not be recognized by the D-jury if it deviates sig-
nificantly from the prescribed execution. An element will not be
recognized or credited for reasons including, but not necessarily
restricted to, the following:
a) If, on Floor Exercise, the element is performed beginning
outside of the floor area (see Section 10 Art. 10.2.1.3a).
b) If, on Vault, the gymnast performs an invalid Vault as defined
in Section 13.
c) If on Horizontal Bar, an element is performed with or from feet
on the bar (see Section 15).
d) If a hold or strength element with straddled legs not listed in
the difficulty tables is performed on any apparatus.
e) If the element is so altered in performance that it can no longer
lay any claim to its identification number or value (see also
Appendix A.3.i), for example:
i. A strength element performed almost entirely with swing.
ii. A swing element performed almost entirely with strength.
iii. A stretched position element performed with a distinct
tuck or pike or vice versa. In such cases an element is
normally given the value of the element as performed.
iv. A strength element normally performed with legs together
is performed with legs straddled.
v. A strength hold element performed with significantly bent
arms.
vi. An element in or to handstand on Rings that is controlled
with the legs or feet against the cables.
f) If the element has been completed with the assistance of a
spotter.
g) If the gymnast falls on or from the apparatus during an element,
Code MAG 2021 23

or alters, or interrupts it in some other manner.
h) If the gymnast falls on or from the apparatus during an element
without having reached an end position that permits continu-
ation with at least a swing.
i) If a strength hold element or a simple hold element is not held.
j) If a press or pull out comes from a strength hold element which
has not been recognized or credited for any reason.
k) If a twisting element on most apparatus is performed with
an over- or under-rotation of 90° or greater or if a swinging
element is performed with a deviation from the perfect end
position of 45° or greater (see also Appendix A.3.i). In some
circumstances, especially on Vault, an over- or under-rotation
of 90° may result in the recognition of different value for the
vault by the D-jury.
l) If, on Pommel Horse, elements in cross support or in side
support deviate from the correct support orientation by 45° or
greater for the greater portion of the element.
m) If strength hold positions or simple hold positions on any ap-
paratus deviate from the correct horizontal body, arm, or leg
position by 45° or greater. This means, for example:
i. Inverted cross with the head of the gymnast entirely above
the circle of the rings. (This is usually >45°).
ii. Cross with the arm pits entirely above the circle of the
rings. (This is usually >45°).
iii. (see also Article 9.2.8).
6. In all cases, the D-jury is to make decisions based on gymnastics
sense and to decide in the interests of the sport of gymnastics. In
cases of doubt, the benefit of that doubt must be given to the gymnast.
7. Elements performed so poorly that they are not recognized by the
D-jury will normally be severely deducted by the E-jury as well.
8. The elements with the highest difficulty values will be counted first
in cases of Special Repetition.
9. For recognition of difficulty on Pommel Horse and Floor Exercise,
the dismount is always counted first.
Article 7.5 Repetition

1. An exercise may not be repeated unless the gymnast has to inter-
rupt his exercise for reasons outside of his control.
2. If the gymnast falls on or from the apparatus, he may choose to
continue with his exercise from the fall or to repeat the missed
element for credit and continue from there. (See Article 9.2.5).
3. No element (same Code Identification Number) may be repeated
for difficulty credit or for Connection Points. This applies also to
elements repeated in connections (exceptions: certain Pommel
Horse elements and circles that increase in value if performed
twice in special combinations, and Rings - see Section 11 and 12).
4. If the difficulty of an element is not recognized for any reason, then
that element can also not meet an Element Group Requirement.
Code MAG 2021 24

Article 7.6 D - Jury Evaluation
Gymnast’s Actions D-jury evaluation
Fulfilling of Element Group Re-

Adding 0.5 for each
quirements
Dismount Element Group Re- A or B value dismount = + 0.0
quirement
C value dismount = + 0.3
D value or higher dismount = + 0.5
Juniors A value dismount = + 0.0
B value dismount = + 0.3
C value dismount or higher = + 0.5
Errors leading to non-recognition
(see Article 7.4 and 9.4) Non-recognition of the Difficulty
Assistance by spotter in comple-

Non-recognition of the Difficulty
tion of element
Not holding Non-recognition of the Difficulty
Repeated element Permitted but given no value
Pushing with feet for dismount or Non-recognition of the element and
other non-legitimate dismount dismount element group require-
ment
Straddled strength hold or other
No recognition of the element
prohibited elements
Section 8
Regulations Governing E score
Article 8.1 Description of Exercise Presentation

1. The Exercise Presentation consists of only those factors that con-
stitute the essence of a contemporary gymnastics performance and
the absence of which results in deductions by the E-jury. These
factors are:
a) The technical, compositional (general expectations for exercise
construction) aesthetic and execution.
2. The Exercise Presentation has a maximum value of 10.0 points.
Article 8.2 Calculation of E-jury deductions

1. The judges of the E-jury, will judge an exercise and determine
the deductions independently and do so within 20 seconds of the
completion of the exercise.
2. Each performance is evaluated with reference to expectations
of perfect performance. All deviations from this expectation are
deducted.
a) Deductions for errors in aesthetic and execution, technique
and composition are summed to a maximum of 10.0 points
for Exercise Presentation.
Code MAG 2021 25

Article 8.3 Instructions for the Gymnast
1. The gymnast must include in his exercise only elements that he
can perform with complete safety and with a high degree of aes-
thetic and technical mastery. The responsibility for his safety rests
entirely with him. The E jury is required to deduct very rigorously
for any aesthetic, execution, composition and technical errors.
2. The gymnast must never attempt to increase the difficulty or the
“D” score at the expense of aesthetic and technical execution.
3. All mounts must commence from the basic stand position, from
a short run (only Parallel Bars and Horizontal Bar), or from a still
hang. Pre-elements or intermediate elements may not precede the
mount. This rule does not apply to Vault where the specific rules
stated for that apparatus apply.
4. Dismounts from all apparatus as well as the conclusion on Floor
Exercise and Vault must end in a standing position with the legs
together. With the exception of Floor Exercise, pushing from the
apparatus with the feet in order to execute the dismount is not
permitted.
Section 9
Technical Directives
Article 9.1 Evaluation by the E - jury

1. The E-Jury is responsible for evaluating all of the aesthetic,
execution and technical performance aspects of an exercise as
well as its compliance with the composition (exercise construction
expectations) for that apparatus. In each case the E -Jury is to
demand that elements be performed with perfection and to perfect
end positions (see also Appendix A.2).
2. The gymnast is expected to include in his exercise only elements
that he can perform with complete safety and with a high degree of
aesthetic and technical mastery. All deviations from that expecta-
tion will be deducted rigorously by the E-jury.
3. The E-jury is not to concern at all with the difficulty of an exercise.
He is obligated to deduct equally severely for any error of the
same magnitude regardless of the difficulty of the element or the
connection.
4. Judges of the E-Jury (and the D-jury) must remain up-to-date with
contemporary gymnastics, must know at all times what the most
contemporary performance expectation for an element should be,
and must know how standards are changing as the sport evolves.
In this context they must also know what is possible, what is
reasonable to expect, what is an exception, and what is a special
effect (see also Appendix A.3).
5. The E-Jury must understand to refrain from deducting when some
elements, which otherwise have no errors, are performed for a
special effect or a special purpose. For example:
i. On Parallel Bars, a basket or a giant swing deliberately per-
formed with flight and travel, and with a late re-grasp has a
special effect and purpose and should not be deducted for not
ending in handstand. However the onus is on the gymnast to
show the effect or purpose in an unmistakable and conspicu-
Code MAG 2021 26

ous manner.
ii. On Horizontal Bar, a giant swing is often modified in prepara-
tion for release elements and dismounts. These should not be
deducted for not passing through a handstand unless they are
unnecessary or so extreme as to violate aesthetic, execution
and technical expectations.
6. If for any reason a judge of the E-Jury cannot reach a decision,
he must give the benefit of the doubt to the gymnast.
7. The E-jury is obligated to deduct twice for two distinctly different
errors in an element, i.e. if the element has both a technical and
an aesthetic execution error. For example a Stützkehre on Parallel
Bars may receive both deductions for insufficient amplitude and
for bent knees.
Article 9.2 Determination of Execution and Technical Errors

1. Each element is defined to the perfect end position or as being
performed with perfection. (See also Part IV).
2. All deviations from correct performance are considered execu-
tion or technical errors and must be evaluated accordingly by the
judges. The amount of the deduction for small, medium, or large
errors is determined by the degree of deviation from the correct
performance. The same deduction is applied each time for the
same severity of bending, whether it be the arms, legs, or the body.
3. The following deductions will apply for each and every discern-
ible aesthetic or technical deviation from the expected perfect
performance. These deductions must be taken regardless of the
difficulty of the element or exercise.
Small Error 0.1 p.
Medium Error 0.3 p.
Large Error 0.5 p.
Fall 1.0 p.
a) Small errors: (deduction = 0.1)
i. Any minor or slight deviation from the perfect end position
and from perfect technical execution.
ii. Any minor adjustments to hand, foot, or body position.
iii. Any other minor violations against aesthetic and technical
performance expectations.
b) Medium errors: (deduction = 0.3)
i. Any distinct or significant deviation from the perfect end
position and from perfect technical execution.
ii. Any distinct or significant adjustments to hand, foot, or
body position.
iii. Any other distinct or significant violation against aesthetic
and technical performance expectations.
c) Large errors: (deduction = 0.5)
i. Any major or severe deviation from the perfect end posi-
tion and from perfect technical execution.
ii. Any major or severe adjustments to hand, foot, or body
position.
iii. Any full intermediate swing.
iv. Any other major or severe violations against aesthetic
Code MAG 2021 27

and technical performance expectations.
d) Falls and spotter assistance: (deduction = 1.0 p.)
i. Any fall on or from the apparatus during an element
without having reached an end position that permits con-
tinuation with at least a swing (i.e. a distinct hang phase
on Horizontal Bar or a distinct support phase on Pommel
Horse after the element in question) or that otherwise
fails to display a momentary control of the element during
landing or re-grasp.
ii. -1.0 is the maximum deduction for an element with a fall,
and including all steps, touches, or support on the floor
or mat leading up to the fall. Other execution deductions
incurred for the element (height, landing extension, insuf-
ficient twist) still apply.
iii. Any assistance by a spotter that contributes to the com-
pletion of an element.
4. On all apparatus at the end of the exercise, if a gymnast does not
perform a dismount, but lands intentionally on the feet, no deduc-
tion for a fall will be considered.
5. After a fall on or from the apparatus, the exercise may be continued
within 30 seconds and the gymnast may use a necessary number
of elements or movements to return to his starting position but all
of these elements and movements must be performed with perfect
execution. He is permitted to repeat the missed element for credit,
except if the fall occurred during a dismount (except Pommel
Horse) or a Vault.
6. Execution errors such as bent knees, bent arms, bad posture or
body position, poor rhythm, poor amplitude, etc. are listed in Articles
9.2 and 9.3 and are always deducted according to the degree of
error or deviation from what is considered perfect performance.
7. Execution errors such as bending the arms, legs or body are
categorized as follows:
Small error Medium error Large error
Slight bending Strong bending. Extreme bending
For better differentiation please use these angular deviation

principles:
Mistake Angular deviation Deduction
Slight bending >0º - 45º 0,1
Strong bending >45º - 90º 0,3
Extreme bending >90º 0,5 + NR
The only exceptions:

- Parallel Bars, bending of the legs before horizontal during the
swing action of a Moy or any giant swing element AND after
Bhavsar type of elements.
- Horizontal Bar, bending of the legs during swing action AND
bending of the arms during regrasping after flight elements
Code MAG 2021 28

The Code of Points gives specific deductions for these exceptions.
8. During hold positions and strength presses, the arms (and where
relevant the body) must be straight throughout the execution of the
element. If the arms and/or body bend at any point the deduction
is:
Mistake Angular deviation Deduction
Small 0º - 15º 0,1
Medium 16º - 30º 0,3
Large 31º - 45º 0,5
Large >45º 0.5 + NR
9. For strength hold or simple hold positions on any apparatus, angu-

lar deviations from the perfect hold position define the magnitude
of the technical error and the corresponding technical deduction:
Small error Medium error Large error

up to 15° 16° - 30° > 30°
> 45° NR.
Examples:
a) Deviations in hold positions of 30° and greater will receive a

large deduction from the E-jury. In addition, deviations of 45°
and greater will lead to the non recognition of the element by
the D-jury.
10. A press from a static strength element that did not have its dif-
ficulty recognized for any reason will also not have its difficulty
Code MAG 2021 29

recognized. The subsequent strength part may be recognised if
technical requirements have been fulfilled.
11. If the preceding strength hold element has received a deduction
for incorrect position, then the same deduction up to a maximum
of 0.30 points applies again to a press from that strength hold ele-
ment if it is determined that the press has been simplified thereby.
This interpretation is intended only for circumstances where a high
position or a technically poor hold makes the subsequent press
easier (i.e. not for presses from faulty L sits, false grips, or for
time of hold positions). This deduction only applies to a high angle
deduction being applied to both elements connected by strength..
12. Technical deductions for angular deviation from the perfect end
position can also apply to swinging skills. In most cases the perfect
end position is defined as a perfect handstand, or during Pommel
Horse circles, as a perfect cross support or perfect side support
position. For swinging elements the following applies:
a) On Floor Exercise, Pommel Horse, Rings, Parallel Bars and
Horizontal Bar, swing elements are often expected to be
performed through rather than to an exact handstand other-
wise the rhythm of an exercise might be interrupted. For that
reason a small angular deviation of up to 15° from an exact
handstand is permitted up to the conclusion of the element. A
small deduction is taken if the deviation from the handstand
is between 16° and 30°.
b) On Pommel Horse, circles and most elements must be per-
formed in, from, or to within 15° of a perfect cross or side
support position. The appropriate angular deviation deduction
is taken each time the error occurs during an exercise. This
means that the E - Jury would deduct for each skewed circle,
whereas the D - Jury would not recognize the element if it
deviates from the correct support orientation more than 45°
for the greater portion of the element.
13. During swing elements which pass through or end in handstand
(see additional rule Art. 15.2 for Horizontal Bar), deviations from
the correct position will be penalized as follows:
up to 15º No deduction.
16° to 30º Small error.
31° to 45º Medium error.
> 45º Large error and non-recognition (D jury).
Note: Deviations in end positions for swinging elements of 45°
and greater (or for twisting elements, of 90° and greater) will
receive a large deduction from the E - Jury and will not be
recognized by the D-jury. However, in some cases, it may be
possible for an element with incomplete twist to be recognized
as a lower value element in accordance with the amount of
twist correctly completed.
14. On Rings, during swings to a hold position or strength presses,
the shoulders and/or body may not rise above the final perfect
hold position. If the shoulders and/or body rise above the final
perfect hold position, the deduction is:
Code MAG 2021 30

Small error up to 15º.
Medium error 16° to 30º.
Large error over 30°.
Non-recognition over 45º (D-jury).
14. All hold elements must be held for a minimum of 2 seconds
measured from the moment that a complete stop position has been
reached. Elements that are not held will receive large deduction
and will not be recognized by the D-jury.
2 seconds no deduction.
Less 2 seconds medium error.
No stop large error and non-recognition.
15. Deductions for poor landings are listed in Article 9.4. A correct
landing is a prepared landing, not one which happens by luck to
end in a standing position. An element should be performed with
such excellent technique that the gymnast has fully completed it
and has had time to reduce rotation and/or extend the body prior
to landing.
16. Landings & Dismounts on the Feet without Deduction.
For safety reasons a gymnast may land or dismount with their feet
apart (enough to properly join their heels together) upon landing
from any salto. The gymnast must complete the landing by bring-
ing his heels together without lifting and moving the front of his
feet. This is done by raising the heels off the mat and joining them
together without lifting the front of the feet. The arms must also be
in complete control with no unnecessary swings.
Action (Without steps, hops, or arm Result

swings)
Landing with feet slightly apart and gym- No deduction
nast lifts heels and joins both heels togeth-
er without lifting and moving the front of his
feet
Landing with feet slightly apart or less than 0.1 deduction for
shoulder width apart and gymnast picks up landing with feet
a foot moving both feet together, OR does apart
not join both feet together by lifting only
the heels
Landing with feet more than shoulder width 0.3 deduction for
apart, AND gymnast picks up one foot mov- landing with feet
ing both feet together, OR does not join apart
both feet together
Note:
- All other execution deductions (those while in the flight phase of
a salto or for lack of extension before landing) must always be
considered in addition to the landing requirements noted above.
17. During landings a small step is defined as a maximum of ‘one
foot’ distance between the feet or distance of the hop. Any greater
Code MAG 2021 31

distance than this would be a large step or hop and attract a
medium deduction.
18. Additional technical deductions are listed in Article 9.4 and specifi-
cally for each apparatus in the appropriate Chapter.
Article 9.3 Expectations for Compositional Exercise Construction

1. The expectations for Compositional exercise construction are those
aspects of an exercise that define the essence of our expectations
and understanding of a gymnastics performance on each ap-
paratus; such things as using the full floor area; swinging without
stops; no repetition; etc. These are specifically defined for each
apparatus in the appropriate chapter.
2. Exercise construction errors include, but are not restricted to, the
following:
a) Gratuitous separation of legs (medium error = 0.3 p. E-jury):
i. The gymnast may not perform elements with a separation
of legs that serves no useful purpose or that detracts from
the aesthetics of a performance. For example, on Parallel
Bars a Stützkehre or a pirouette may not be performed
with legs apart; on Horizontal Bar and Rings, elements
may not be performed with a back-forward separation of
the legs; on Rings, crosses, swallows, and handstands
may not be performed with a separation of the legs; etc.
Most elements permitted or required to be performed with
separated legs are listed in the Difficulty Tables.
b) Repetition of elements
i. Repeating of elements is permitted but they cannot re-
ceive credit for difficulty or connection points. However,
they are evaluated normally by the E-jury.
c) Layaways, empty and intermediate swings (medium or large
error = 0,3 or 0,5 by the E-jury):
i. An empty swing is a swing at the end of which no element
is performed or no new support or hang position or grip
is achieved (medium error by the E-jury).
ii. An intermediate swing is two successive empty swings
(large error by the E-jury).
iii. Layaways are back swings in support or in upper arm
support that simply reverse direction and swing back
down in or to a lower hang or support position (also if
accompanied by a grip change) (medium error by the
E-jury).
d) Lowering of Legs on Swings to Handstands.
The table below shows the actions to be taken for lowering of
the legs during swings to handstand:
Code MAG 2021 32

Action Angle Deviation
from original posi-
E-Jury D-Jury
tion
-0.1 small - 0-15°
-0.3 medium - 16°-30°
-0.5 large - 31°-45°
-0.5 large non-recognition >45°
3. Exercise Construction stipulations and deductions that apply spe-

cifically to each apparatus are listed in the appropriate Chapters.
Article 9.4 E - Jury deductions

These deductions are to be applied on all apparatus and Floor
Exercise by the E-jury when the corresponding error is made. See
Sections 10 to 15 for additional errors and deductions specific to
each apparatus.
Code MAG 2021 33

Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Deductions for aesthetic and execution errors
Non-distinct positions (tuck,

+ + +
pike, straight).
Adjust or correct hand or
+
grip position each time.
Walking in handstand or
hopping (each step or hop). +
Touching apparatus or floor

+
with legs or feet.
Hitting apparatus or floor. +
Gymnast touched but not
assisted by spotter during +
an exercise.
Interruption of exercise +
without fall.
Bent arms, bent legs, legs
apart. + + +
Poor posture or body posi-

tion or postural corrections
+ + +
in end positions.
Saltos with knees or legs ≤ shoulder > shoulder

apart. width width
Legs apart on landing.

≤ shoulder > shoulder
width width
Unsteadiness, minor adjust-

ment of feet, or excessive +
arm swings on landing.
Loss of balance during any Large step

Slight
landing with no fall or hand or hop or
imbalance,
support. (Maximum -1.0 touching
small step
total for steps and hops). the mat
or hop, 0.1
with 1 or 2
per step
hands
Fall or support with 1 or 2
1.0
hands during any landing.
Fall during any landing
1.0 and non
without feet contacting mat
–recognition by
first.
the "D” Jury
Atypical straddle. +
Other aesthetic errors. + + +
Code MAG 2021 34

Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Deductions for Technical errors
Deviations in swings to or
>45° and non-
through handstand or in 15° - 30° 31° - 45°
recognition
circle elements.
Angular deviations from 31° - 45°
perfect hold positions. up to 15° 16° - 30° >45°and non
recognition
Press from poorly held deductions equivalent to those for the hold
positions. position are repeated (max. 0,3)
Incomplete twists. 61° - 90°
up to 30° 31° - 60° >90°and non
recognition
Lack of height or amplitude
on salto and flight elements. + +
Additional or intermediate
+
hand support.
Strength with swing and
+ + +
vice versa.
Duration of hold parts (2 sec.). non stop and
less 2 sec. non- recogni-
tion
Interruption in upward
+ + +
movement.
Lowering of legs on ele- 31° - 45°
ments to a handstand (from 0 - 15° 16°-30° >45° no-
original position) recog.
Two or more attempts at a
hold or strength part. + +
Unsteadiness in or fall from

swing or
handstand.
+ big distur-
bance
Fall from or onto apparatus.

1,0
Intermediate swing or half or

layaway. layaway whole
Assistance by spotter in the 1.0 and non –

completion of an element. recognition by
the “D” Jury
Lack of extension in prepa-
ration for landing. + +
Other technical errors. + + +
Code MAG 2021 35

PARTIE III PART III PARTE III
Les agrès de compétition Apparatus Aparatos
- Exercices au sol - Floor Exercise - Suelo
- Cheval arçons - Pommel Horse - Caballo con arcos
- Anneaux - Rings - Anillas
- Saut - Vault - Salto
- Barres parallèles - Parallel Bars - Paralelas
- Barre fixe - Horizontal Bar - Barra
Code MAG 2021 36

Section 10: Floor Exercise
Dimensions: 12 m. x 12 m.
Article 10.1 Exercise description

A Floor Exercise is composed predominantly of acrobatic elements
combined with other gymnastic elements such as strength and
balance parts, elements of flexibility, handstands, and choreographic
combinations all forming a harmonious rhythmic exercise which is
performed utilizing the entire floor exercise area (12 m x 12 m).
Article 10.2 Content and Construction
Article 10.2.1 Information about Exercise Presentation

1. The gymnast must begin his Exercise within the floor area, from
a still stand legs together. The exercise and evaluation begin with
the first movement of the feet of the gymnast.
2. The gymnast must include only elements that he can perform with
complete safety and with a high degree of aesthetic and technical
mastery.
3. Additional execution and exercise construction expectations are:
a) The exercise must occur entirely within the floor area. Elements
initiated outside of the floor area will be evaluated in the normal
fashion by the E-Jury but will not be recognized by the D-Jury.
i. The space available for Floor Exercise is delineated by
boundary lines or colour separations. Lines are considered
to be a part of the floor area. The gymnast may step onto
the line, but not over the line or on the outside colour.
ii. Going outside of the marked floor area will be controlled by
2 line judges who sit diagonally opposite each other near
the FX area. Each line judge observes the 2 boundary lines
nearest him. When line violations occur, the line judge must
advise the D1 judge in writing, using the following criteria:
- Landing or touching with one foot or one hand outside
the floor area = 0,10.
- Touching with feet, hands, foot and hand or with any
other part of the body outside of the floor area = 0,30.
- Landing directly outside the floor area = 0,30.
- Elements initiated outside the floor area have no value.
The D1 judge will take the appropriate deduction from the
final score.
iii. If the gymnast has stepped outside of the floor area, steps
required to return back into the area are not deducted.
b) The duration of the Floor Exercise is a maximum of 75 seconds
which will be verified by a timer. There is no minimum time.
The Time Judge will give an audible warning signal at 65 sec-
onds and again at 75 seconds to indicate the maximum time
Code MAG 2021 37

prescribed to the exercise. The time is measured from the first
movement of the feet of the gymnast through to the dismount,
which must end in a standing position with legs together. If
the exercise does not comply with the prescribed time, the
timer will signal the judge D1 who will take the corresponding
deduction from the Final Score.
c) The full floor are must be used. There is no limit to the number
of times a diagonal may be used in succession for acrobatic
elements. However, if a gymnast wishes to use the same
diagonal more than 2 times in a row, he must first complete
an element from EGR I (minimum B-Value) after the 2nd use
of that diagonal. In addition, the gymnast must go to and or
from, each corner of the floor. If the final tumbling pass takes
the gymnasts towards an unused corner, this will fulfil the
requirement for that corner having been utilized. Failure to
go to and/or from each corner, as defined, will result in a 0.3
neutral deduction taken by the D-jury once during an exercise.
Using the same diagonal 3 times in a row, in violation of the
requirement stated above, will result in a 0.3 neutral deduction
taken by the D-jury once during an exercise
d) Pauses of two seconds or longer before acrobatic series or
elements are not permitted. Simple movements of the arms
are included in the definition of a pause and therefore the two
seconds begins the moment the gymnast comes to a stand..
e) Each acrobatic element or series must end in a visibly con-
trolled landing and pause before continuing to a non-acrobatic
element. Uncontrolled momentary landings during such transi-
tions are not permitted.
f) Dive rolls must show a momentary support of both hands; that
is, these may not be performed without hand support or with
contact only on the back of the hands.
g) The exercise must end with an acrobatic element that lands
with both feet together.
h) A gymnast must not use simple steps to arrive in the corner.
Simple steps occur when a gymnast repositions himself on
the floor area without any choreography (turning ≥180 degree,
jumping, lifting leg above horizontal during step, etc.).
i) The deduction for aesthetic and execution errors in the saltos
is per element not for every salto included in the element.
4. For a full list of errors and deductions governing Exercise Presenta-
tion, see Section 9 and the summary of deductions in Articles 9.4
and 10.3.
Article 10.2.2 Information about the D score

1. The Element Groups (EG) are:
I. Non-acrobatic elements.
II. Acrobatic elements forward (saltos and handsprings) and
fwd. rollout elements (no salto).
III. Acrobatic elements backward (saltos and handsprings),
and Arabian elements.
Code MAG 2021 38

2. The dismount cannot be from Element Group I.
3. For seniors, A double salto element is required in the exercise and
must be inside the 10 (8 for juniors) counting elements.
4. Information about Difficulty and elements group:
a) Acrobatic elements can be connected but retain their indepen-
dent values.
b) For floor exercise, one element can fulfill only one Element
Group requirement. If one element is executed as dismount
(Element Group II, or III), it can fulfill only the Dismount Group
requirement, and the gymnast must include one more element
from the same Element Group as the dismount inside the
exercise in order to receive the respective Element Group
points. The element used for the dismount is the first of five
counted within a specific element group, except in the instance
of basic repetition.
c) All Arabian elements are in the group of acrobatic elements
backward, Example Arabian double front ½ = same as double
back 1/1 (D value). The following Arabian elements (Jump bwd.
with ½ t. to double salto fwd.) have the same value and Code
box as the bwd. double salto element with the same amount of
twisting: Arabian dbl. str. ½ (Penev), Arabian dbl. str. (Tamayo)
and Arabian dbl. str. 1/1 (Hypolito).
5. Information about connections (CV).
- D or higher + B or C = +0.1, D or higher + D or higher = +0.2 .
- Connections can be awarded on both sides of one element.
- For connection bonus, all elements and is not necessary must
be inside the 10 counting elements.
- No connection for counter saltos (example Double salto bwd.
1/1 to salto fwd. 1/1).
- No connection bonus will be given for directly connected single
saltos with turns (example: salto bwd. with 5/2 turn to salto fwd.
1/1 turn)
- Limit of 2 connections total in an exercise.
- If a gymnast completes two or more elements for connection
bonus and receives a large deduction for any reason an uncon-
trolled landing or jumping to prone, then no connection bonus
will be awarded for that particular connection.
6. Additional information and regulations:
a) 3/2 salto elements with reception by and then spring from the
hands are not permitted.
b) Saltos rollout and jumps to prone position are not permitted
for value.
c) All permitted elements that finish with a rollout or finish in front
support position are listed in the Difficulty Tables. For safety
reasons, no new such elements are permitted.
d) Unless otherwise indicated in the Difficulty Tables, circle and
flair elements have the same value and identification number.
Wende swings with legs apart are not permitted.
e) Unlisted strength holds with straddled legs are not permitted.
f) Elements involving two strength parts for one Code value
require a stop position in both strength parts to receive the
listed value, a lower value WILL be awarded if a stop occurs
Code MAG 2021 39

for only one of the strength parts. Example: Manna (1 s.) and
press handstand (no stop)= C value for the Manna.
g) All circles/flairs begin and end in front support.
h) No extra elements may be added before or after element I.94
(Flair to handstand hopping backward handstand pirouettes
and back to flair) for an increase in value.
Example: addition of a spindle before I.94 will NOT increase the
value. The MTC has applied a principle where only acrobatic
elements can be awarded more than a D value.
i) All Japanese handstands require closing of the legs and
requires the head to be within one hand width of the floor. Or
In order for a Japanese handstand to be recognised without
deduction the expectation is that the top of the gymnasts’ head
must be ≤ 5 cm of the floor.
7. Special repetitions:
a) A maximum of 2 strength elements (including strength hand-
stands) may be performed in an exercise for content value.
Elements I.1 to I.48 are considered to be strength elements,
except:
- Element I.19 - Handstand (2 sec).
- Element I.31 - ½ or 1/1 turn in handstand or to handstand.
b) A maximum of 2 circle, flair, or Russian value parts may be
performed in an exercise for content value.
8. For a further list of regulations governing non-recognition of ele-
ments and other aspects of the “D score”, see Section 7 and the
summary of deductions in Article 7.6.
Code MAG 2021 40

Article 10.3 Specific Deductions for Floor Exercise.
D Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Exercise longer than 75 sec. ≤ 2 sec. >2 - 5 sec. > 5 sec.
Landing or touching with one
foot or one hand outside the +
floor area.
Touching with feet, hands, foot
and hand or with any other
+
part of the body outside of the
floor area.
Landing directly outside the
floor area. +
No pass to and/or from each

+
corner.
Using same diagonal more +
then 2 times in a row. (each time)
No double salto element (for
+
Seniors only)
Elements initiated outside the
No value
floor area.
E Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Insufficient height in acrobatic
+ +
elements.
Lack of flexibility during static
+ +
elements.
Roll-out elements without hand On back of Without
support. hands support
Pause 2 sec. or more before
+
element or acrobatic series.
Uncontrolled momentary land-
+ + +
ings (also in transitions).
Simple steps or transitions to
+
arrive to the corners.
Jump to prone landing after
+
salto
Code MAG 2021 41

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Elements non-acrobatiques - Non-acrobatic Elements - Elementos no acrobáticos
1. De l’appui renvs. s’abaisser à l’équerre ou à 2. Équerre, jambes levées à la vertical (2 s.). 3. Équerre, jambes à l’horizontal (2 s.). 4. 5. 6.
l’équerre écartée (2 s.). V-sit (2 s.). V-sit with legs horiz. (2 s.).
From hdst. lower to L-sit or strad. L-sit (2 s.). Ángulo, piernas verticales (2 s.). Ángulo piernas horizontales (2 s.).
Desde ap. inv.., bajar a ángulo o ángulo p. ab. (2 s.). (Manna)
7. De la station, appui renv. suisse (2 s.). 8. S’élever corps fléchi, bras tendus ou corps 9. l’Équerre jambes vert.(2 s.) et s’élever à l’appui 10. l’Équerre jambes horiz.(2 s.) et s’élever à l’appui 11. 12.
From stand, Swiss press to hdst. (2 s.). tendu, bras fléchi à l’appui renv. (2 s.). renv. (2 s.) aussi jambes écartées. renv. (2 s.) aussi jambes jambes écartées.
Desde el apoyo, apoyo invertido suizo (2 s.). Piked body, str. arm or str. body, bent arm press V-sit (2 s) and press to hdst. (2 s.) also with strad. Manna (2 s.) and press to hdst. (2 s.) also with
to hdst. with legs together (2 s.). legs. strad. legs.
Elevarse cuerpo flex., brazos ext. o cuerpo ext., Ángulo piernas verticales (2 s.) y elevarse al Ángulo piernas horiz. (2 s.) y elevarse al apoyo
brazos flex. al apoyo invertido (2 s.). apoyo invertido (2 s.) también con p. abiertas. inv. (2 s.), también con piernas abiertas.
13. De la position couchée faciale, avec élan 14. Appui renv. suisse du gr. écart. de l’éq. ou éq. 15. 16. Du Manna (2 s.), renversement a l’appui 17. 18.
s’élever à l’appui renversé (2 s.). écartée ou de couché facial (2 s.). renversé (2 s.).
Rock to hdst. from prone position (2 s.). Swiss press from split, L-sit, strad. L-sit or front From Manna (2 s.), turn over (dislocation) to
Desde la posición acostada facial, con impulso sup. (2 s.). handstand (2 s.).
elevarse al apoyo invertido (2 s.). Apoyo invertido suizo desde Spagat, ángulo o Desde Manna (2 s.), dislocar al apoyo invertido
ángulo piernas abiertas (2 s.). (2 s.).
(Riek)
19. Appui renversé (2 s.). 20. S’élever lent. ou s’abaisser ou élan à la croix 21. Du gr. écart. s’élever lent. à la croix renversé 22. 23. 24.
Handstand (2 s.). renv. (2 s.). (2 s.).
Apoyo invertido (2 s.). Press or lower or swing to Japanese hdst. (2 s.). From split press to Japanese handstand (2 s.).
Subir o bajar o impulso a cristo invertido (2 s.). Desde spagat elevarse lentamente a cristo
invertido (2 s.).
Code MAG 2021 42

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Appui facial horizontal jambes écartées (2 s.). 26. Appui facial horizontal. (2 s.). 27. Hirondelle (2 s.). 28. 29. 30.
Support lever, legs straddle (2 s.). Support lever (2 s.). Swallow (2 s.).
Apoyo facial horizontal piernas abiertas (2 s.). Apoyo facial horizontal (2 s.). Hirondelle (2 s.).
31. ½ ou 1/1 tour en app. renv. ou à l’app. renv. 32. De l’appui facial horizontal ec. (2 s.) s’élever à 33. De l’appui facial horizontal 2 s. s’élever à l’appui 34. De l’hirondelle 2 s. s’élever lent. à la croix 35. 36.
½ or 1/1 turn in handstand or to handstand. l’appui renversé (2 s.). renversé (2 s.). renversé. (2 s.).
½ o 1/1 giro en apoyo inv. o al apoyo invertido. From straddled support lever (2 s.) press hdst. From support lever 2 s. press handstand (2 s.). From Swallow 2 s. press to Japanese hdst. (2 s.).
(2 s.). Desde apoyo facial horizontal, 2 s. elevarse al Desde hirondelle 2 s. elevarse a cristo inv. (2 s.).
Desde el ap. facial horizontal piernas abiertas, ap. inv. (2 s.).
(2 s.) elevarse al apoyo invertido (2 s.). (Alvariño)
37. De l’équerre, éc., tour arr. à la station. 38 39. 40. 41. 42.
From L-sit, etc., turn over bwd. to stand.
Desde ángulo piernas abiertas voltear a la
posición.
43. 44. Roulé éc à l’appui renversé (2 s.). 45. Roulé carpé à l’appui renversé (2 s.). Aussi 46. 47. 48.
Endo roll to handstand (2 s.). jambes écartées dans la phase finale.
Rodar piernas abiertas al apoyo invertido (2 s.). Endo roll piked to handstand (2 s.). Also final
phase with straddle.
Rodar en carpa al apoyo invertido (2 s.). Tam-
bién con la fase final con piernas abiertas.
- Peut être exécuté jambes écartées pour atteindre la position ATR dans la phase finale de l’élément, et ce, sans déduction.
* - May straddle the legs without deduction to reach the handstand position in the final phase of the element.
- Puede abrir las piernas sin deducción para llegar al apoyo invertido en la fase final del elemento.
- Ne doivent pas venir nécessairement depuis l’appui tendu renversé pour être reconnus.
** * ** -- Does not need to come from handstand to be recognised.
** No es necesario venir desde el apoyo invertido para ser reconocido.
Code MAG 2021 43

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. De la station ou de l’appui couché dorsal, 1 50. 51. 52. 53. 54.
jambe fléchie, renv. arrière ou à l’appui renverse.
From stand or rear support, push off 1 foot
through hdst. or back walkover.
Desde la pos. o el ap. acostado dorsal, 1 p. flex.,
inversión atrás, o al apoyo invertido.
(Menichelli)
55. Renversement avant. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60.

Forward walkover.
Paloma.
61. Grand écart transversal ou latéral (avec arrêt). 62. 63. 64. 65. 66.
Cross or side split (stop required).
Spagat de frente o lat. (se necesita parar).
67. Toutes les balances (2 s.). 68. Toutes les balances éc. 180°, sans appui des 69. 70. 71. 72.
Any standing scale (2 s.). mains (2 s.).
Todas las planchas (2 s.). Any standing scale with 180° straddle, no hand
hold (2 s.).
Todas las planchas piernas abiertas 180º, sin
apoyo de manos (2 s.).
Code MAG 2021 44

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. Saut en arrière à l’appui ou couché facial. 74. Saut en arrière avec carpé - tendu ou av. 1/1 75. 76. 77. 78.
Jump bwd. to front support. t. à l’appui facial.
Salto atrás al apoyo acostado facial. Jump bwd. with pike-stretch or with 1/1 turn to
front support.
Salto atrás en carpa - extendido o adelante
con 1/1 g al apoyo acostado facial.
(Endo)
79. Papillon. 80. Papillon avec 1/1 tour avant ou arriéré. 81. Papillon avec 2/1 tour. 82. 83. 84.
Butterfly. Butterfly with 1/1 twist fwd. or bwd. Butterfly with 2/1 twist.
Papillon. Papillon con 1/1 giro adelante o atrás. Papillon con 2/1 giros.
(Tong Fei)
85. Variantes de breakdance. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90.

Breakdance variations.
Variantes de Breakdance.
91. 1 cercle des jambes serrées ou écartés. 92. Cercles des jambes serrées ou écartées à 93. Cercles d. jambes à l’appui renv. et s’abaisser 94. Cercles d. jambes saut arr. à l’ap renv. avec 360º 95. 96.
1 circle or flair. l’appui renversé. en cercles des jambes éc. ou cercles d. jamb. et s’abaisser cercles des jambes éc. (2 saut).
1 molino o molino piernas abiertas. Circles or flair to handstand. Flair or circle to hdst. continue to flair or circle. Flair hopping with 360° t. bwd. thr. hdst and back
Molinos o molinos piernas abiertas al apoyo Molinos o molinos piernas abiertas al apoyo to flair (2 hops).
invertido. invertido y bajar a molinos o molinos p. ab. Molinos p. ab. salto atrás con 360º al apoyo
(Gogoladze) invertido con giro y bajar a molino p. abiertas. (2
saltos).
Code MAG 2021 45

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. De l’appui renversé s’abaisser en cercles des 99. 100. 101. 102.
jambes écartées ou serrées.
Lower from hdst. to flair or circle.
Desde el apoyo invertido bajar a molinos o
molinos piernas abiertas.
103. Cercles d. jambes écartés avec ½ pivot. 104. Cercles d. jambes écartés avec 1/1 pivot 105. Cercles d. jambes écartés a >270 pivot (dans 106. 107. 108
Flair with ½ spindle. (dans 2 cercles). 2 cercles) directement à l’appui renverse.
Molinos o molinos p. abiertas con ½ giro. Flair with 1/1 spindle (in 2 circles). Flair with >270 spindle (in 2 circles) directly to
Molinos o m. piernas abiertas con 1/1 giro (en handstand.
dos molinos). Molinos p. abiertas con giro >270 (en 2 moli-
nos) directamente al ap. inv.
109. 110. Cercles d. jambes écartés. a ½ pivot à l’appui 111. 112. Cercles d. jamb. éc. a >270 pivot (dans 2 113. 114.
renv. cercles) direct. à l’app. renv et s’abais. en cerc.
Flair with ½ spindle to handstand. des jamb. éc. ou cercl. d. jamb.
Molinos o molinos piernas abiertas con ½ giro Flair with > 270º spindle (in 2 circles) directly
al apoyo invertido. to handstand and continue to circle or flair.
Molinos p. ab. con giro > 270º (en 2 molinos)
direc. al ap. inv. y bajar a molino o molino p. ab.
115. Facial russe avec 360° ou 540°. 116. Facial russe avec 720° ou 900°. 117. Facial russe avec 1080° ou plus. 118. 119. 120.
Russian wendeswing with 360° or 540°. Russian wendeswing with 720° or 900°. Russian wendeswing with 1080° or more.
Rusas con 360° o 540°. Rusas con 720° o 900°. Rusas con 1080° o más.
(Fedorchenko)
Code MAG 2021 46

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
121. Rouler en arrière à l’appui renv. avec ½ t. 122. Rouler en arrière avec 1/1 t. sauté à l’appui 123. 124. 125. 126.
Roll bwd. through hdst. with ½ t. renversé.
Rodar atrás al apoyo invertido con ½ g. Roll bwd. with hop 1/1 t. through hdst.
Rodar atrás con 1/1 g. saltado al ap. invertido.
127. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132
133. 134. 135. 136. 137. 138.
139. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144.
Code MAG 2021 47

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG II: Parties acrobatiques en avant (saltos et renversements) et éléments de roulés (sans salto)- Acrobatic elements forward (saltos and handsprings) & fwd. rollout elements (no salto) - Elementos acrobáticos
ad. (mortales y palomas) y elementos a rodar ad. (sin mortal)
1. Bascule de nuque ou de tête avec ½ t. à l’appui 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
renv. ou 1/1 t à l’appui dorsal.
Neck or head spring w. ½ t. to hdst. or 1/1 t. to
rear support.
Báscula de nuca o cabeza con ½ g. al apoyo
invertido o apoyo acostado facial.
7. Renversement avant. 8. 9. 10. Renversement salto avant groupé (style Mari- 11. 12.
Forward handspring or flyspring. nich) à station.
Paloma adelante o flic flac adelante. Handspring salto fwd. tuck (Marinich style).
Paloma mortal agrupado (estilo Marinich).
(Morandi)
13. Saut de poisson. 14. Saut avec 1/1 t. et renversement avant. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Dive roll. Jump with 1/1 twist to fwd. hdsp.
Tigre. Salto con 1/1 y paloma.
19. Salto avant groupé ou carpé. 20. Salto avant tendu. 21. Salto avant tendu à l’appui facial. 22. Double salto avant groupé. 23. Double salto avant carpé. 24.
Salto fwd. tucked or piked, also with ½ t. Salto fwd. stretched, also with ½ t. Salto fwd. str. to front support. Double salto fwd. tucked, also with ½ t. Double salto fwd. piked, also with ½ t.
Mortal adelante agrupado o en carpa. Mortal adelante extendido. Mortal adelante ext. al apoyo acostado facial. Doble mortal adelante agrupado. Doble mortal adelante en carpa.
Code MAG 2021 48

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Salto avant sur 1 jambe écartée. 26. 27. 28. 29. Double salto avant groupé avec ½ t. 30. Double salto avant carpé avec ½ t.
Aerial walkover fwd. Double salto fwd. tucked with ½ t. Double salto fwd. piked with ½ t.
Mortal adelante sobre con 1 pierna. Doble mortal adelante agrupado con ½ g. Doble mortal adelante en carpa con ½ g.
22 23
31. Salto avant groupé ou carpé, avec ½. 32. Salto avant groupé avec 1/1 t. 33. 34. 35. 36.
Salto tucked and piked ½ t. Salto tucked with 1/1 t., also with 3/2 t.
Mortal adelante agr. o en carpa, con ½. Mortal adelante agr. con 1/1 g.
19
37. 38. Salto av. tendu avec ½ t. 39. Salto av. tendu avec 1/1 t. 40. Salto av. tendu avec 2/1 t. 41. Salto av. tendu avec 5/2 t. 42. Salto av. tendu avec 3/1 t.
Salto fwd. str. with ½ t. Salto fwd. str. with 1/1 t., also with 3/2 t. Salto fwd. str. with 2/1 t. Salto fwd. str. with 5/2 t. Salto fwd. str. with 3/1 t.
Mortal ad. ext. con ½ g. Mortal ad. ext. con 1/1 g. Mortal ad. ext. con 2/1 g. Mortal ad. ext. con 5/2 g. Mortal ad. ext. con 3/1 g.
20
(Shirai 2)
43. 44. Salto avant groupé avec 3/2 t. 45. Salto av. tendu avec 3/2 t. 46. 47. 48. Salto av. tendu avec 7/2 t.
Salto tucked 3/2 t. Salto fwd. str. with 3/2 t. Salto fwd. str. with 7/2 t.
Mortal adelante agr. con 3/2 g. Mortal ad. ext. con 3/2 g. Mortal ad. ext. con 7/2 g.
(Goshima)
39 G
22
Code MAG 2021 49

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Salto av. gr. ou ca. à l’appui facial. 51. Salto av. gr., ca. ou tendu avec 1/1t. à l’appui fac. 52. 53. Double salto avant groupe avec 1/1 t. 54.
Salto fwd. t. or p. to front support. Salto fwd. t., p or str. with 1/1 t. to front support. Double salto fwd. tucked with 1/1 turn.
Mortal adelante agrupado o en carpa al apoyo Mortal adelante agrupado en carpa o ext. con 1/1 Doble mortal adelante agrupado con 1/1 giro.
acostado facial. g. al apoyo acostado facial.
53
55. 56. 57. 58. Saut en av. ½ t. et double salto arr. gr. ou c. 59. 60. Double salto avant groupé avec 3/2 t.
Jump fwd. with ½ t. to dbl. salto bwd. t. or p. Double salto fwd. tucked with 3/2 turn.
Salto ad. con ½ g. y doble mortal at. ag. o carp. Doble mortal adelante agrupado con 3/2 giro.
(Deferr) (Zapata)
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66.
67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.

Code MAG 2021 50

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG III: Parties acrobatiques en arrière (saltos et renversements), et saltos en arrière avec demi tour - Acrobatic elements backward (saltos and handsprings), & Arabian elements - Elementos acrobáticos atrás
(mortales y palomas)
1. Salto arrière groupé ou carpé. 2. Salto arrière tendu. 3. Double salto arrière groupé. 4. Double salto arrière gr. ou carpé avec 1/1 t. Aussi 5. Double salto arrière groupe avec 2/1 t. 6. Double salto arrière groupé avec 3/1 t.
Salto backwards tucked or piked. Salto backwards stretc. or Tempo salto bwd. Double salto bwd. tucked. saut en arr. avec ½ t. et dbl. salto av. gr. ou carpé Double salto bwd. tucked with 2/1 t. Double salto bwd. tucked with 3/1 t.
Mortal atrás agrupado o en carpa. Mortal atrás extendido. Doble mortal atrás agrupado. avec ½ t. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 2/1 g. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 3/1 g.
Double salto bwd. t. or piked with 1/1 t. Also
Arabian double t. or p. with ½ t. (Ri Jong Song)
Doble mortal atrás ag. o en carpa con 1/1 g.
También ½ g. doble ad. con ½ g.
G
(Tsukahara)
7. Salto arrière groupé ou carpé avec ½ t. ou salto 8. Salto arrière tendu avec ½ t. ou salto arr. tendu 9. 10. Saut en arr. avec ½ t. et dbl. salto av. gr. ou 11. Double salto arrière groupé arr. avec 3/2 t. ou 12. Double salto arrière groupé avec 5/2 t.
arr. gr. ou carpé avec ½ t. avec ½ t. carpé ou double salto arr. gr. ou carpé avec ½ t. salto arr. tendu avec 3/2 t. et salto av. groupé. Double salto bwd. tucked with 5/2 t.
Salto backwards tucked or piked w. ½ t. or Salto backwards str. w. ½ t. or Arabian str. Arabian double tucked or piked or double salto Double salto bwd. t. with 3/2 t. or Salto bwd. str. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 5/2 g.
Arabian tucked or piked. Mortal atrás extendido con ½ g. o salto atrás bwd. t. or p. with ½ t. 3/2 to fwd. salto tucked
Mortal atrás agrupado o en carpa con ½ g. o con medio giro mortal adelante ext. Salto at. con ½ g. doble ad. agr. o en carpa o Doble mortal atrás agr. con 3/2 g. o mortal atrás
salto atrás con medio giro mortal adelante doble mortal atrás agr. o en carpa con ½ g. ext. con 3/2 g. mortal ad. agrupado
Aussi/Also/También Korosteljev
13. Renversement arrière. 14. Salto tempo arrière. 15. Double salto arrière carpé. 16. 17. 18. Triple salto arrière groupé.
Back handspring. Tempo salto bwd. Double salto bwd. piked. Triple salto bwd. tucked.
Flic flac. Tempo. Doble mortal atrás en carpa. Triple mortal agrupado.
(Liukin)
19. 20. Salto arrière groupe avec 3/2 t. 21. Salto arrière tendu avec 3/2 t. 22. Salto arrière tendu avec 5/2 t. 23. Salto arrière tendu avec 7/2 t. 24.
Salto backwards tucked w. 3/2 t. . Salto bwd. str. with 3/2 t. or 2/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 5/2 t. Salto bwd. str. with 7/2 t.
Mortal atrás agr. con 3/2 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 3/2 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 5/2 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 7/2 g.
(González)
Code MAG 2021 51

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. Salto arrière tendu avec 1/1 t. 27. Salto arrière tendu avec 2/1 t. 28. Salto arrière tendu avec 3/1 t. 29. 30. Salto arrière tendu avec 4/1 t.
Salto bwd. str. with 1/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 2/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 3/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 4/1 t.
Mortal atrás ext. con 1/1 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 2/1 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 3/1 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 4/1 g.
(Shirai / Nguyen)
8 21
31. . 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.
37. Saut en arrière avec ½ t. et saut de poisson. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42.
Jump bwd. with ½ t. to roll fwd.
Salto atrás con ½ g. y tigre.
43. Saut en arr. avec ½ t. et renversement avant. 44. Saut en arrière avec ½ t. et salto avant gr. ou 45. 46. 47. Double salto écarté avec 1/1 t. 48. Salto arr. tendu avec 2/1 t. et salto arr. carpée.
Jump bwd. with ½ t. to handspring forward. carpé à l’appui ou couché facial. Double salto straddled with 1/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 2/1 t and salto bwd piked.
Salto atrás con ½ g. y paloma. Jump bwd. with ½ t. to salto fwd. t. or p. to f. sup. Doble mortal lateral piernas ab. con 1/1 g. Mortal atrás ext. con 2/1 g. y mortal at. en carpa.
Salto atrás con ½ g. y mortal adelante agrupado (Lou Yun) (Kolyvanov)
o en carpa al apoyo acostado facial.
Code MAG 2021 52

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. 52. Double salto arrière tendu. 53. salto arr. avec ½ t. double salto av. ou double 54. Double salto arrière t. avec 3/2 t. ou salto arr.
Double salto bwd. stretched. salto arrière tendu avec ½ t. avec ½ t. double salto av. avec 1/1 t.
Doble mortal atrás extendido. Arabian Jump bwd. to dbl. salto fwd. str. or Double salto bwd. str. with 3/2 t. or arabian
double salto bwd. stretched with ½ t. Jump bwd. to dbl. salto fwd. str. with 1/1 t.
Salto ½ g. doble mortal ad. o doble mortal atrás Doble mortal atrás extendido con 3/2 g. o salto
extendido con ½ g. ½ g. doble mortal ad. con 1/1 g.
Tamayo
Aussi/Also/También Hypolito
55. 56. 57. 58. 59. Double salto arrière tendu avec 1/1 t. ou salto 60. Double salto arrière t. avec 2/1 t.
arr. avec ½ t. double salto av. avec ½ t. Double salto bwd. str. with 2/1 t.
Double salto bwd. stretched with 1/1 t. or arabian Doble mortal atrás extendido con 2/1 g.
Jump bwd. to dbl. salto fwd. str. with ½ t.
Doble mortal atrás extendido con 1/1 g. o salto
½ g. doble mortal ad. con ½ g.
Aussi/Also/También Penev
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. Double salto arrière t. avec 5/2 t.
Double salto bwd. str. with 5/2 t.
Doble mortal atrás ext. con 5/2 t.
G
67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. Double salto arrière t. avec 3/1 t.
Double salto bwd. str. with 3/1 t.
Doble mortal atrás ext. con 3/1 g.
(Shirai 3)
H
Code MAG 2021 53
Section 11: Pommel Horse
Height: 105 cm from top of mat, 115 cm from the floor.
Article 11.1: Exercise description

A contemporary Pommel Horse exercise is characterized by a variety
of support positions on all parts of the horse, permitting different
types of circular swings with legs apart and together, single leg
swings and/or scissors, and swings through the handstand position
with or without turns. All elements must be executed with swing and
without the slightest interruption of the exercise. Strength and hold
elements are not permitted.
Article 11.2: Content and Construction

1. The gymnast must start his exercise from a standing position.
An approach step or hop is permitted. The evaluation begins the
moment the gymnast’s feet leave the floor.
2. The gymnast must include only elements that he can perform with
mastery.
3. Additional execution, technical and exercise construction expecta-
tions are:
a) The exercise must consist exclusively of swings without visible
pauses or visible use of strength.
b) Oblique positions during flair and circle work are not permitted.
Circles and flairs may be performed only in cross support or in
side support positions. Furthermore, all turning elements must
begin and end in either cross support or side support.
c) Ideally circles and flairs must be performed with complete
extension. Lack of amplitude in body position is deducted
as an individual deduction on for each element. Circles with
a slightly hollow position are permitted. Hip breaks during
individual elements in an exercise should be deducted as
separate technical errors on each circle or flair.
d) Wendeswings must be performed with legs together. Straddled
wendeswings are considered atypical and are deducted ap-
propriately Legs appart during Wenderswings are considered
as an execution error (Art 9.4.) and must be deducted for each
full turn.
e) During scissors and single leg swings, the gymnast must
demonstrate a significant elevation of his hips and a large
separation of the legs.
Code MAG 2021 54

Amplitude Deduction
Above shoulder line 0.0
Between shoulder and horizontal line. 0.1
Lower horizontal line. 0.3
f) Handstand elements must be achieved with completely straight

arms and without any interruption of swing or obvious use of
strength.
g) In flair or circle to handstand dismounts and elements returning
to flairs or circles (or support), execution deductions for hesita-
tion, strength, bent arms, lowering of the hips, and unsteadi-
ness must be considered on the rise to the handstand, within
the pirouette, the lower from the handstand, and the extension
of the flairs or circles upon completion of the element. There is
no deduction for bending of the hips on the rise to handstand.
h) A simple handstand dismount must cross the body of the horse
and facing the long axis of the horsem while also landing adja-
cent to the last hand suport position. (JEFF AND ELIMINATE
THE I)
h) A dismount must normally cross the body of the horse and
land in cross stand facing along the long axis of the horse
while landing adjacent to the last hand support position. Such
a dismount will be considered as atypical and be deducted 0,3
for turning problems. (Art 9.4.)
i) A simple handstand dismount must cross the horse in order to
be recognized. A handstand dismount does not have to cross
the horse provided that It includes a turn of at least 270º from
the side support or 360º from the cross support.
j) Expectations for scissor to handstand elements:
- The gymnast is expected to swing to handstand without
strength or hesitation, with hips stretched throughout.
- A scissor to handstand with pronounced hip bend and
strength should receive these two separate deductions
from the E jury. However in cases with extreme bending
of the hips and/or strength only one large deduction must
be applied.
- Scissors to handstands demonstrating swing with strength
and/or lowering of the hips or legs will be deducted by the
E jury.
- All scissors to handstand require the legs to close.
k) Clarifications concerning evaluation for Li Ning all Scissor to
handstand performed with hand(s) stepping errors:
Code MAG 2021 55

- Step down off pommel with one hand with return to the
single pommel = D value (D jury) and -0.3 + other execu-
tion errors (E jury) for uncontrolled handstand support.
- Step down off pommel with one hand with no return to the
single pommel= D value (D jury) and -0.5 + other execu-
tion errors (E jury) for uncontrolled handstand support.
- Step down off pommel with two hands= no value (D jury)
and -0.5 or -1.0 (dependent on continuance of exercise
or fall) + other execution errors (E jury).
Note: All other scissors to handstand with support of both hands
on the leather = no value (D jury) and -0.5 or -1.0 (dependent
on continuance of exercise or fall) + other execution errors (E
jury).
l) All dismounts other than handstand dismounts must be ex-
ecuted with the body at a minimum angle of 30º above the
shoulder horizontal line before landing. For angles lower than
30º, deductions will be applied according to the specific errors
and deductions table for pommel horse, Art. 11.3.
m) If a gymnast believes he did not receive value for his dismount,
he may repeat any dismount for value (one time only) within
30 seconds of completing the original attempt. If the original
dismount received a large deduction, and the dismount is
repeated, the large deduction must be increased to -1.0 by
the E jury.
and 11.3.
Article 11.2.2 Information about the “D score”

I. Single leg swings and scissors.
II. Circle and flairs, with and/or without spindles and hand-
stands, Kehrswings, Russian wendeswings, flops and
combined elements.
III. Travel type elements, including Krolls, Tong Fei, Wu
Guonian, Roth and Traveling Spindles.
IV. Dismounts.
a) General
a.1) Unless otherwise indicated elements on the leather have
the same value as those performed on two pommels.
a. 1) Unless otherwise indicated, all circle elements (includ-
ing travels, spindle and wenderswing), begin and end in
front support.
a.2) Unless otherwise indicated all ½ turns (Czechkehres,
Stöckli and reverse Stöckli, double Swiss), have the same
value.
a.3) Unless otherwise indicated, each element is defined as
occurring within one structure and ending when a new
structure is initiated, as follows (Exception: the combined
series provision):
i. A hop element ends at the completion of the hop or
Code MAG 2021 56

series of hops.
ii. A circle or flair element ends when it changes to the
other.
iii. A spindle element ends when the spindle action stops.
iv. A front support element (wendeswing) ends when the
wende action stops.
v. Travel elements in cross support end when the travel
action or the cross support position is either inter-
rupted by a circle or some other element or is ended
in some other way.
vi. For difficulty recognition purposes, travelling elements
can be considered finished as soon as the travel is
completed, front support position with both hands on
the applicable part of the horse.
vii. Magyar & Sivado may share a common circle con-
necting them and receive D+D difficulty. To receive
credit for an A value circle between the two travels,
the A value circle must be completed fully from front
support to front support.
viii. In the Code of Points Belenki, Urzica, and Moguilny
(EG III) may begin from cross support (also facing
out) minus 90º on first turn AND OR final turn, with
travel from one end to the other
a.4) From side sup. on 1 end, travel bwd. over both p. to
side sup. on the other end (3/3) in 2 circles w.- must be
completed with no pommels for D value.
a.5) From side sup. on 1 end, travel fwd. over both p. to side
sup. on the other end (3/3) in 1 circle w.- must be com-
pleted with no pommels for D value.
a.4/5) For all travel in side support start position 1-2 and final
position 4-5 considered as enough to fulfill requirements.
a.6) In order to further simplify the rules regarding falls, all
listed elements in EGII and EGIII, except elements
through handstand and lower to support with straddle
legs, require a listed CoP element afterwards for value.
The only exception would be a swing forward with both
legs (half circle) and finishing the circle with one leg, fol-
lowing by simple leg swing or scissor.
For example: On one pommel: L, L, S, S finishing in front
support sideways and half circle with followed motion
backward with one leg. D jury action: E value element and
element without value If a fall occurs, no partial difficulty
can be awarded. In the case of a fall after starting the
subsequent element, the previous element will receive
credit.
a.7) All Sohn and Bezugo type elements from a stand (and not
from a circle element) will be valued two letters lower than
the value from the listed element in the Code of Points.
Sohn and Bezugo are defined from support on two pom-
mels 360º turn to finish in front support on two pommels.
If gymnast does not finish with hands on both pommels,
there is no credit awarded for these specific elements.
Code MAG 2021 57

a.8) A Russian Wendeswing to a dismount beginning in cross
support facing out must complete Russian(s) as listed
before the Wende to receive full dismount value.
a.9) A Wu Guonian requires a minimum 360° of body turn to
be completed with one or two hands between the pom-
mels. After Wu Guonian the gymnast might add any listed
elements in the CoP (R180, R360, etc).
a.10) No additional elements may be added to increase the
value of these elements:
• Kehre fwd., rev. Stöckli, kehre fwd. (Element III.70,
Moguilny).
• Kehre bwd., kehre fwd., kehre bwd. (Element III.76,
Belenki).
b) Circles
b.1) Unless otherwise indicated, all circle elements begin and
end in front support.
b.2) Unless otherwise indicated, the value and identification
numbers of elements performed in circle or flair are identi-
cal. Such elements are illustrated at random in either the
circle or the flair positions throughout the Difficulty Tables.
This means Element II.28 can be performed several dif-
ferent ways:
• With legs together, side support 1/1 spindle inside
max 2 circles
• With legs straddled, side support 1/1 spindle inside
max 2 circles
• With legs straddled, side support 1/1 spindle inside
max 2 circles with hands outside of one pommel
b.3) All basic circles in cross and side support (also on one
pommel) may end with a ¼ turn without changing the
structure or value of the element.
b.4) Step up to pommel, with or without ¼ turn, is B value
Circle with or without ¼ turn on one pommel, and counts
as start to flop sequence (Element II.14).
c) Handstand
c.1) There is no upgrade in value for turning within a hand-
stand from scissors.
c.2) There is no upgrade in value for the performance of turn-
ing within a handstand (from circles or flairs) solely on the
pommels. Turning within a handstand requires a majority
use of the leather.
c.3) When performing a 3/3 travel during a handstand (within
an exercise or dismount), “support” with one hand must
be shown on both ends of the horse to receive the 3/3
upgrade in value. There is no upgrade in value for ad-
ditional to requires turning (indicated in the table bellow),
within a handstand from circles or flairs
c.4) Increases in Value for Handstands from circle or flairs:
Code MAG 2021 58

1. Circle or flair handstand dismounts.
Handstand
“B” “C” “D”
w/450° turn OR
C D E
3/3 travel*
w/450° turn AND
D E F
3/3 travel*
*3/3 travel requires minimum 270º turn.
2. Circle or Flair Handstand and lower to leg swing.
Handstand
“B” “C” “D”
w/360º turn OR
C D E
3/3 travel*
w/360º turn AND
D E F
3/3 travel*
3. Circle or Flair Handstand and lower to circle/flair.
Handstand
“B” “C” “D”
Lower to circle/
C D E
flair
w/360º turn OR
D E F
3/3 travel*
w/360º turn AND
E F G
3/3 travel
c.5) Swing with strength and/or lowering of the hips or legs
in achieving handstands from a scissor or from circles or
flairs (including dismounts) will receive the value for the
element and element group (D jury) with E-jury deduc-
tions. However, if there is a large error, no recognition will
be given for the handstand or dismount. In the case of a
large deduction, the gymnast will receive a -0.5 deduction
and only deductions for aesthetic errors (legs, feet, bent
arms, touch horse, etc.). No deductions for strength or
angle will be applied.
c.6) All scissors through handstand on one pommel require
a change of arm or pommel to receive value.
d) Combined elements
d.1) It is possible to combine certain elements on a single
pommel. There are two types of such combined elements
listed in the Element Group II:
i. Flop type elements may include combinations of any
of the following on one pommel: circle in side sup-
port, circle in cross support (with or without ¼ turn),
Code MAG 2021 59

Direct Stöckli B, and/or Direct Stöckli A, Bertonceli
and ¾ Bezugo; the DSA may only appear at the end
of the sequence. Such combined elements (flops)
can only be of D or E value (i.e. 3 or 4 elements).
As an exception a D flop performed in flair = E, and
an E flop performed in flair = F. Only one such flop
sequence may be used in an exercise for value.
The following examples illustrate this rule:
• DSB + DSB + DSA = D value flop.
• Circle on one pommel + DSB + DSB + DSA = E
value flop
ii. Combined sequences on one pommel of circle and/
or Stöckli A or B, (Bertonceli and ¾ Bezugo??) with
Russian wendeswings. The circle and/or Stöckli B,
(Bertonceli and ¾ Bezugo ??) can either precede or
follow the Russian wendeswings and must appear as
2 consecutive circle elements to be part of a two-flop
Combined Sequence. The DSA may only appear at
the end of the sequence. Only one of these combined
sequences may be used during an exercise.
Russian 1 flop 2 flops

R18 or R27 (B) + D
R36 or R54 (C) + D E
R72 or R90 (D) + E F
R108 (E) + F G
iii. In any case when a combined element is involved,

the gymnast will not have the right to make use of
the same element three times in direct succession.
iv. Flop and combined elements must be separated
by minimum one circle with one hand off of the one
pommel
v. A DSB is considered finished in side support front-
ways on one pommel.
d.2) No other double elements will be credited for higher
value. For example: 2 circles or 2 DSB’s in any position
receive credit only for the first circle or DSB and no value
or recognition for the second.
d.3) DSA requires ¼ turn in and ¼ out.
e) Spindles
e.1) Spindles in EG II in cross or side support with legs to-
gether or flair must be performed within a maximum 2
circles (3 front support positions after the original start
position) for D value.
e.2) There are two D value 1/1 Spindles (EG II) in the Code
of Points:
• Any side support 1/1 spindle w. legs strad. inside max.
2e circles- Element II.28.
• Any cross or side support 1/1 spindle within max. 2
circles. (also with 1/3, ½ or 2/3 travel) (Magyar)- Ele-
ment II.34.
Code MAG 2021 60
Both may be performed in the same exercise.
f) Dismounts
f.1) Pommel Horse is the only apparatus where a dismount
may be repeated (one time only) if the gymnast deter-
mines he may not have received credit because of a fall or
a large deduction. This must be done within the allowable
time. If the gymnasts steps off the podium (this includes
the stairs), the exercise is terminated.
f.2) In the case of a repeated dismount, the gymnast has 30
seconds to remount the horse and perform any type of
dismount of his choice for value and EG IV.
f.3) Examples of repeating a PH dismount are:
Example 1
D Jury E Jury
Action Gymnast
evaluation evaluation
Stöckli to Falls while at- No value or -1.0 and any
Handstand tempting the EG IV deductions
270° t. 3/3 dis- handstand prior to the ac-
mount attempt tion of falling
Repeated Successfully D value (0.4) -0.0

Stöckli to repeats St. and +0.5
Hdstd. 270° t. Handstand EG IV
3/3 dismount 270° t. 3/3 with
within the time no deductions
permitted.
Example 2
D Jury E Jury
Action Gymnast
Stöckli to Lowers legs No value or -0.5 (lowering
Handstand with large de- EG IV legs) and
450° t. 3/3 dis- viation then any aesthetic
mount attempt completes dis- deductions
mount
Repeated Successfully E value (0.5) The -0.5

Stöckli to repeats St. and +0.5 (lowering
Hdstd. 450° t. Handstand EG IV legs) must
3/3 dismount 450° t. 3/3 with be changed
within the time -0.0 deduction to -1.0 for a
permitted. fall plus any
deductions
viewed on
the second
attempt.
Code MAG 2021 61

Example 3
D Jury E Jury
Action Gymnast
Russian 1080° Falls at 900° No value -1.0 and any
Dismount at- deductions
tempt prior to the ac-
tion of falling
Repeated Successfully D value (0.4) -0.1 for leg

Russian 1080° repeats Rus- and +0.5 separation
Dismount sian 1080° EG IV
within the time dismount with
permitted. -0.1 leg sepa-
ration
In Example 3, the judge cannot always determine if the first
Russians are a dismount attempt.
a) A maximum of two (3/3) cross support travels (forwards and/
or backwards) are permitted during the exercise. This rule
applies to the following nine ??? travels ONLY:
• III.41 3/3 cross support travel fwd. with hop (Driggs), E
value
• III.45 Travel fwd.in cross support with support on leather,
pommel, pommel, leather(3/3) (1-2-4-5), C value.
• III.46 Any other travel fwd. in cross support to other end
(3/3) (Magyar), D value.
• III.51 Fr. cr. sup. on end, tr. fwd. in 2 circles to 1st p., to 2nd
p., with ¼ turn to side sup. on other end (3/3) (Bilozerchev),
C value.
• III.53 3/3 cross support travel fwd. in flairs.
• III.57 Travel bwd.in cross sup with support on leather,
pommel, pommel, leather(3/3) (5-4-2-1), C value.
• III.58 Any other travel bwd. in cross support to other end
(3/3) (Sivado), D value.
• III. 59 Travel backward in cross support over both pommels.
(Kurbanov)
• III. 65 Any other travel bwd. in cross support to other end
(3/3) in flairs.
i.e. Nin Reyes type elements (3/3 travel with spindle) are NOT
considered with this rule.
b) A maximum of two Russian Wendeswings are permitted for
value in an exercise, including the dismount. For Pommel
Horse this Special repetition rules are wider, any Russian
Wenderswing on the leather including dismount considered
as repetition.
The following examples illustrate this rule: Russian on the end
1080º + Russian 720º to wende = No value + C value.
Russian between pommels 360º + Russian on the end 1080º
+ Russian 360º to Wende = C value + Repetition + B value
(dismount counts first).
Excluded from the rule are flop/ Russian combinations on one
pommel, Kroll (III.87), Roth (III.88), Wu Guonian (III.89), and
Tong Fei type elements (III.81, 82, 94, 95) elements.
c) A maximum of 2 handstand elements are permitted for value
Code MAG 2021 62

in an exercise from circles, flairs, or scissors (not including the
dismount).
d) A maximum of two (3/3) Russian Wendeswings travel elements
are permitted for value in an exercise This rule applies to the
following travels ONLY: XXXXXXX
e) A maximum of two 3/3 travel with spindle elements are permit-
ted for value in an exercise This rule applies to the following
travels ONLY: XXXXXXXXX
f) A maximum of two full spindle elements are permitted for
value in an exercise This rule applies to the following spindle
ONLY: XXXXXXX
Code MAG 2021 63

Article 11.3 Specific Deductions for Pommel horse
D Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Non utilization of all 3 parts
+
of the horse.
E Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Lack of amplitude in scis-
+ +
sors and single leg swings.
Handstand with visible
strength or bent arms. + + +
Pausing or stopping in
+ + +
handstand.
Hip Breaks with circles.
+ +
Lack of body extension

in circles or flairs. Each +
element
Bent or Legs apart during

0º - 30º 31º - 60º 61º - 90º
elements.
Angular deviations in cross
support circles and travels. >45º
>15º- 30° >30º- 45º
no - recog.
Landing obliquely or not +

+
facing out from the long deviation
deviation >45
axis of the horse. 90º
Non handstand dismounts,
body position under 30º
+
over shoulder horizontal
line.
Scissor to handstand with
+
hip bend. + +
no - recog.
Scissors to handstand
without closing the legs. + +
Extra ½ swing on mount

without a leg changing
+
sides.
Unsteadiness in the hand-

stand dismount, turning + +
problems.
Lowering of legs on 31° - 45°

elements to a handstand 0 - 15° 16°-30° >45° no-
(from original position) recog.
Failure to cross the horse

on a simple handstand +
dismount
Code MAG 2021 64

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Élans d’une jambe et ciseaux - Single leg swings and scissors - Impulsos de una pierna y tijeras
1. Ciseau avant. 2. 3. Double ciseau avant avec transport latéral par 4. Ciseau av. avec ¼ t. par l’appui renverse sur 1 5. 6.
Scissor forward. l’ATR. arçon, retour à l’appui jambes éc. transversal,
Tijera adelante. Double Scissor Fwd. with Travel Sideways dans l’autre bras.
through Handstand. Scissor fwd. w. ¼ t. through hstd. on 1 p., lower
Tijera doble adelante con desplazamiento lateral to sup. w. strad. legs on the other arm.
a través del apoyo invertido. Tijera ad. con ¼ g. por el ap. inv. sobre 1 arco,
volver al ap. p. ab. transv. en el otro brazo.
(Stepanyan)
(Li Ning)
7. Ciseau avant avec ½ t. 8. Ciseau avant avec saut latéral (aussi avec 1/2 t.). 9. Ciseau av. avec saut latéral d’une extrême à 10. 11. 12.
Scissor forward with ½ t. Scissor forward with hop swd. (also with 1/2 t.). l’autre (3/3).
Tijera ad. con ½ g. Tijera ad. con salto lateral (también con 1/2 g.). Scissor fwd. with hop swd. from one end to the
other (3/3).
Tijera adelante con salto lateral de un extremo
al otro (3/3).
13. Ciseau arrière. 14. Double ciseau avant (¼ t. av. et ¼ t. arr.). 15. Double ciseau av. (¼ t. av. et ¼ t. arr.) avec 16. Double ciseau av. avec salto lateral d’une extr. 17. 18.
Scissor backward. Double scissor fwd.(¼ t. fwd. a. ¼ t. bwd.). transport lateral. à l’autre (3/3).
Tijera atrás. Doble tijera ad. (¼ g. ad. y ¼ g. at.). Double scissor fwd. (¼ t. fwd. a. ¼ t. bwd.) with Double scissor forward with hop sideways from
travel sdw. one end to the other (3/3).
Doble tijera ad. (¼ g. ad. y ¼ g. at.) con des- Tijera doble con salto lat. desde un extremo al
plazamiento lateral. otro (3/3).
(Mikulak)
19. Ciseau arrière avec ½ t. 20. 21. Élan en arr. avec ¼ t. par l’app. renvs. sur 1 22. Élan en arr. avec ¼ t. par l’app. renvs. sur 1 23. 24.
Scissor backward with ½ turn. arç., retour à l’app. jamb. éc., dans l’autre bras. arç., retour à l’app. jamb. éc., dans l’autre bras.
Tijera atrás con ½ g. Swing bwd. w. ¼ t. through hstd. on 1 p., Swing bwd. w. ¼ t. through hstd. on 1 p., lower
lower to sup. w. strad. legs on the other arm. to sup. w. strad. legs on the other arm.
Impulso at. con ¼ g. por el ap. inv. sobre 1 arco, Impulso at. con ¼ g. por el ap. inv. sobre 1 arco,
volver al apoyo p. abiertas. en el otro brazo. volver al apoyo p. abiertas. en el otro brazo.
Code MAG 2021 65

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Élans d’une jambe et ciseaux - Single leg swings and scissors - Impulsos de una pierna y tijeras
25. 26. Ciseau arrière avec saut lat. (aussi avec ½ t.). 27. Ciseau arrière avec saut latéral d’une extr. à 28. 29. 30.
Scissor bwd.with hop swd.(also with ½ t.). l’autre (1-2 a 4-5).
Tijera atrás con salto (también con ½ g.). Scissor bwd. with hop swd. from one end to the
other (1-2 to 4-5).
Tijera atrás con salto lat. de un extremo al otro
(1-2 a 4-5).
31. 32. Double ciseau arrière (¼ t. av. et ¼ t. arr.) 33. 34. Ciseau av. avec 1/4 t. à l’app. renv., 1/4 t. et retour 35. 36.
Double scissor bwd. (¼ t. fwd. a. ¼ t. bwd). sur un bras, jambes écartés à l’autre arçon.
Doble tijera atrás (¼ g. ad. y ¼ g. atrás). Scissor fwd. 1/4 t. to hdst., 1/4 t. and straddle
down bwd on 1 arm on the other pommel.
Tijera ad. con 1/4 g. al ap. inv., 1/4 g. y descender
sobre un brazo piernas abiertas al otro arco.
(Bryan)
MOVE TO # 4
37. 38. 39. 40. Ciseau arrière avec ¼ t. à l’appui renv., ¼ t. et 41. 42.
retour sur un bras, jambes écartés à l’autre arçon.
Scissor bwd. ¼ t. to hdst., ¼ t. and straddle down
bwd on 1 arm on the other pommel.
Tijera at. con ¼ g. al ap. inv., ¼ g. y descender
sobre un brazo piernas abiertas al otro arco.
MOVE TO # 21 (C)
43. 44. Mouvement éc. d. jamb. en arr. par l’app. renvs. 45. Mouvement éc. d. jamb. en arr. par l’app. renvs. 46. 47. 48.
et retour à l’app. jamb. éc. transv. et retour au cercle éc., cercle jambes serrées.
Leg cut or undercut bwd. through hdst. and Leg cut or undercut bwd. through hdst. and
lower to support w. strad. legs. lower to flair or circle.
Movimiento p. abiertas atrás por el apoyo inver- Movim. piernas abiertas atrás por el apoyo inver-
tido y volver al ap. p. abiertas transversalmente. tido y volver a molino o molino piernas abiertas.
Code MAG 2021 66

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG II: Cercles des jambes serrées et éc. avec ou sans pivots et appuis renversé, passés dorsaux, russes faciaux, flop et éléments combinés.- Circle and flairs, with and/or without spindles and handstands, Kehr-
swings, Russian w., flops and combined elements - Molinos, molinos p. abiertas, con o sin giros y apoyo invertido, Keres, Rusas, flops y elementos combinados
1. Tout cercle des jambes ou cercle éc. (Thomas) 2. Cercle d. jambes en appui latéral sur 1 arçon. 3. 4. 5. 6.
en appui latéral. Circle in side support on 1 pommel.
Any circle or flair in side support. Molino en apoyo lateral sobre 1 arco.
Todo molino o molinos p. abiertas ap. lateral.
(Thomas)
7. 8. Cercle avec app. sur chaque extrémité ou entre 9. 10. 11. 12.
les arçons.
Circle with support outside pommels or between
the pommels.
Molino con ap. sobre cada extr. o entre los arcos.
13. Cercles d. jamb. en appui facial transv. sur l’extr. 14. Cercles des jambes en appui transversal sur 1 15. 16. 17. 18.
Circles in cross support frontways on end. arçon (de ou avec ¼ t. avant).
Molinos en apoyo facial transv. sobre el extr. Circles in cross support on 1 pommel (from or
to ¼ t. fwd.).
Molinos en apoyo transversal sobre un arco
(desde o con ¼ g. ad.).
19. Cercles des jambes en appui dorsal transversal 20. Cercles des jambes en appui transversal entre 21. 22. 23. 24.
sur l’extrémité. les arçons.
Circles in cross support rearways on end. Circles in cross support between the pommels.
Molinos en apoyo dorsal transversal sobre el Molinos en apoyo transversal entre los arcos.
extremo.
Code MAG 2021 67

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Cercles des jambes en appui latéral, ¼ pivot 26. Appui latéral, ½ pivot. 27.Appui latéral, ½ pivot av. les ac. entre les mains 28. Tout 1/1 pivot en appui latéral dans max. 2 c. 29. Tout app. lat, 1/1 pivot av. les arçons entre les 30. Appui latéral, 1/1 pivot av. les ac. entre les mains
en appui transversal. Any ½ spindle on the end. (cercles d. jambes ec. ou cercles d. jambes). des jambes ec. mains (cercles d. jamb. ec. ou cerc. d. jamb). (cercles d. jambes ec. ou cercles d. jambes).
Any ¼ spindle on the end. Apoyo lateral en el final, ½ spindle. Side support, ½ spindle with both pommels Any side support pommel between hands 1/1 Any side support 1/1 spindle with hand support to Side support, 1/1 spindle with both pommels
Molinos en ap. lat., ¼ pivot en apoyo transv. between the hands (flair or circle). spindle w. legs straddle inside max. 2 circles. the other side and return (max. 2 flairs or circles). between the hands (flair or circle).
Apoyo lateral, ½ pivot adelante arcos entre las Cualquier ap. lat., 1/1 pivot máx. en 2 molinos Cualquier ap. lat. 1/1 pivot con apoyo de mano Apoyo lateral, 1/1 pivot adelante arcos entre las
manos (molinos p. abiertas o molinos). piernas abiertas. al otro lado y volver (máx. 2 molinos p. abiertas manos (molinos p. abiertas o molinos).
(Keikha 2) o molinos). (Keikha 1)
(Eichorn)
(Keikha 5
31. App. transv. sur l’extrém., cercles d. jamb.avec 32. App. transv. sur l’extrém., ½ pivot. 33. 34. Tout appui transv. avec 1/1 pivot dans max. 2 35. Appui facial transv., 1/1 pivot av. mains entre les 36.
¼ pivot en app. lat. Cross support on end, ½ spindle. cercles (aussi avec ⅓, ½ ou 2/3 transport). arc. max. 2 cercles (aussi avec ⅓ transport).
Cross support on end, circle with ¼ spindle to Apoyo transv. sobre un extr., ½ pivot. Any cross support 1/1 spindle within max. 2 Cross support, 1/1 spindle with hands between the
side support. circles. (also with ⅓, ½ or 2/3 travel). pommels max. 2 circles. (also with ⅓ travel).
Apoyo transv. sobre el extr., molinos con ¼ pivot Cualquier apoyo transv. con 1/1 pivot en máx. Apoyo facial transv., 1/1 pivot ad. manos entre los
en apoyo lateral. 2 molinos. (también con ⅓, ½ o 2/3 despl.). arcos (máx. 2 molinos). (también con ⅓ despl.).
(Magyar)
(Sellathurai 2)
(Sellathurai)
37. 38. Cercle éc. ou cercles à l’app. renvs. et retour à 39. Cercle éc. ou cercles à l’app. renvs. (avec ou 40. 41. 1/1 pivot dans les arçons dans max. 2 cercles. 42.
l’appui jambes éc. transv. sans ½ t.) et retour au cercle éc. ou cercle. de jambes serrées ou écartées.
Flair or circle through hdst. and lower to sup. w. Flair or circle through hdst. (with or without ½ 1/1 spindle w. legs straddle or together on the
strad. legs. t.) and lower to flair or circle. pommels inside max. 2 circles.
Molino o molinos p. ab. al ap. inv. y volver al Molino o molino p. ab. (con o sin ½ g.) y volver 1/1 pivot en los arcos máx. en 2 molinos piernas
apoyo piernas abiertas transversal. a molino o molino p. abiertas. abiertas o cerradas.
(Tippelt) (Berki)
43. 44. 45. Cercle éc. avec transport sauté arr. à l’app. 46.Cercle éc. avec transport sauté arr. à l’app. 47. 48.
renvs. et retour à l’app. jambes éc. transv. renvs. et retour à cercle d. jambes ou cercle éc.
Flair with hop travel bwd. through hdst. and Flair with hop travel bwd. through hdst. and lower
lower to sup. w. straddle legs. to circles or flairs.
Molino p. abiertas con desplaz. saltado at. al ap. Molino p. ab. con desplaz. saltado atrás al ap.
invertido y volver al apoyo, piernas ab. transv. inv. y volver a molino o molino p. abiertas.
Code MAG 2021 68

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Stöckli directe A (SDA). 51. Stöckli inv. ou SDA avec jamb. éc. à l’app. renvs. 52. Stöckli directe A (SDA) XXXXXXX. 53. 54. Stöckli inv., DSA ou cercles sur l’arçon jambes
Direct Stöckli A (DSA). on the pommels or pom- et retour à l’app. jamb. éc. transv. Direct Stöckli A (DSA) outside pommels. écartées a l’a.t.r. 3/3 transport (av.- arr.) avec 360
mel between hands. Reverse Stöckli or DSA strad. through hdst. and Stöckli Directa A fuera de los arcos. t. et s’abaisser aux cercles des jambes écartés.
Stöckli directa A (SDA). lower to sup. w. strad. legs. Reverse Stöckli, DSA or pommel circle strad.
Stöckli invertida o SDA p. ab. al apoyo inv. y through hdst., 3/3 travel (fwd.- bwd), 360º turn
volver al ap. piernas ab. transv. to flairs.
Stöckli inv., SDA o molino en un arco p. ab. al
ap. inv., 3/3 (ad.- at.) desplaz., 360º g. a molino
p. abiertas.
(Keikha 3 (Keikha 6)
(Busnari)
55. 56. Stöckli direct B (SDB). 57. 58. 59. 60.
Direct Stöckli B (DSB).
Stöckli directa B (SDB).
61. Passé dorsal avant avec ½ t. (double dorsal). 62. Passé dorsal arrière avec ½ t. sauté sur les 63. 64. 65. Passé dorsal avec 1/1 t. sur 1 arçon. 66.
Double rear (kehr). arçons. Kehr with 1/1 turn on 1 pommel.
Pase dorsal adelante con ½ g. (doble dorsal). Kehrswing bwd. hop with ½ t. on the pommels. Pase dorsal con 1/1 g. sobre 1 arco.
Pase dorsal con ½ g. saltado sobre los arcos.
(Sohn)
67. 68. Passé dorsal avec 270º t. sur 1 arçon (technique 69. Passé dorsal avec 270º t. sur 1 arçon (technique 70. 71. 72.
Sohn) de l’appui transversal a latéral. Sohn) de l’appui latéral a transversal.
Kehr with 270º t. on 1 p. (Sohn technique) from Kehr with 270º t. on 1 p. (Sohn technique) from
cross to side support. side to cross support on 1 pommel..
Pase dorsal con 270º g. en 1 arco (técnica Sohn) Pase dorsal con 270º g. en 1 arco (técnica Sohn)
desde apoyo transversal a lateral. desde apoyo lateral a transv.
(Bertoncelj)
Code MAG 2021 69

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. Tramelote directe. 75. 76. 77. 78.
Direct Tramlot.
Tramelot directo.
79. Passé facial avant avec ½ t. à l’appui facial 80. Stöckli inversé, tour 180° ou 270° dans un 81. Stöckli inversé avec 270° t. a 1 arçon. 82. 83. Stöckli inversé avec 360° t. sur 1 arçon. 84.
lat. sur l’extr., de l’appui latéral, en utilisant 1 cercle. Reverse Stöckli with 270° t. (Bezugo technique) Reverse Stöckli with 360° t. on 1 pommel.
ou 2 arçons. Reverse Stöckli, 180° or 270° turn in one circle. from side to cross support on 1 pommel to 1 Stöckli invertida con 360° g. sobre 1 arco.
Wendeswing fwd. w. ½ t. to sup. fw. on the end, Stöckli invertida, 180º o 270º de giro en un pommel.
from side support using 1 or 2 pommels. molino. Stöckli invertida con 270° g. a un 1 arco. (Bezugo)
Pase fac. ad. con ½ g. al ap. fac. lat. sobre el
extr., desde apoyo lateral usando 1 o 2 arcos.
85. 86. Suisse double. 87. 88. Tchèque dorsal, appui sur l’extrémité des 89. 90.
Double Swiss. arçons.
Suiza doble. Czechkehre outside p.
Checa dorsal, ap. sobre el extremo de los
arcos.
(Pinheiro)
91. Costal allemand. 92. Tchèque dorsal sans les arçons ou sur les arçons. 93. 94. 95. 96.
Schwabenflank. Czechkehre on the leather or pommels.
Costal alemana. Checa dorsal sin los arcos o sobre los arcos.
Code MAG 2021 70

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. Facial russe avec 180° ou 270°. 98. Facial russe avec 360° ou 540°. 99. Facial russe avec 720° ou 900°. 100. Facial russe avec 1080° et plus. 101. 102.
Russian wendeswing with 180° or 270°. Russian wendeswing with 360° or 540°. Russian wendeswing with 720° or 900°. Russian wendeswing with 1080° or more.
Rusa facial con 180° o 270°. Rusa facial con 360° o 540°. Rusa facial con 720° o 900°. Rusa facial con 1080° y más.
103. Sur le cheval ou, facial russe avec 180° ou 104. Sur le cheval, facial russe avec 360° ou 540°. 105. Sur le cheval, facial russe avec 720° ou 900°. 106. Sur le cheval, facial russe avec 1080° et plus. 107. 108.
270°, aussi avec transport. On the leather , Russian wendeswing with 360° On the leather, Russian wendeswing with 720° On the leather, Russian wendeswing with
On the leather, Russian wendeswing with 180°, or 540°. or 900°. 1080° or more.
or 270° also with travel. Sobre el caballo, rusa facial con 360° o 540°. Sobre el caballo, rusa facial con 720° o 900°. Sobre el caballo, rusa facial con 1080° o más.
Sobre el caballo, rusa facial con 180° o 270°,
también con desplazamiento.
109. 110. Facial russe avec 180° ou 270° sur 1 arçon 111. Facial russe avec 360° ou 540° sur 1 arçon ou 112. Facial russe de 720° ou. 900° sur 1 arçon ou 113. Facial russe de 1080° ou plus sur 1 arçon ou 114.
ou entre les arçons. entre les arçons. entre les arçons. entre les arçons.
Russian wendeswing with 180° or 270° on 1 Russian wendeswing with 360° or 540° on 1 720° or 900° Russian wendeswing on 1 pom- 1080º Russian wendeswing or more on 1
p. or between the pommels. pommel or between the pommels. mel or between the pommels. pommel or between the pommels.
Rusa facial con 180° o 270° sobre 1 arco o Rusa facial con 360° o 540° sobre 1 arco o Rusa facial con 720° o 900° sobre 1 arco o Rusa facial 1080º o más en 1 arco o entre los
entre los arcos. entre los arcos. entre los arcos. arcos.
115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120.
Code MAG 2021 71

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG III: Transports incluant Krolls, Tong Fei, Wu Guoniang, Roth et transport avec pivots. - Travel type elements, including Krolls, Tong Fei, Wu Guonian, Roth and Traveling Spindles - Desplazamientos, incluyen-
do Krolls, Tong Fei, wu Guonian, Roth desplazamientos con giro.
1. Cercles d. jambes avec transport av. à l’appui 2. Cercles des jambes avec transport avant à l’appui 3. Cercles des jambes avec transport avant à 4. De l’appui facial latéral sur 1 extrém., transp. 5. 6.
latéral (aussi avec ¼ tour). latéral (3/3). l’appui latéral (3/3), mains entre les arçons. av. par-dessus les 2 arçons à l’appui latéral sur
Circles with any travel fwd. in side support (1/3) Circles with any travel fwd. in side support (3/3). Circles with Any travel fwd. in side support (3/3), l’autre extrém. (3/3) entre 1 cercle d. jambes.
(also with ¼ t.). Molinos con desplazamiento adelante al apoyo hands between pommels. From side sup. on 1 end., Any travel in side
Molino con desplazamiento adelante al apoyo lateral (3/3). Molinos con desplazamiento ad. al ap. lat. (3/3), support (3/3) fwd. over both pommels to sup. on
lateral (también con ¼ g.). manos entre los arcos. other end (3/3) in 1 circle.
De ap. facial lat. sobre 1 extremo, desplazamien-
to ad. por encima de los 2 arcos al apoyo lateral
sobre el otro extremo (3/3) en un molino.
7. 8. Cercles d. jambes avec transport avant sauté à l’appui 9. Cercles d. jambes avec transport av. sauté 2 x 10. De l’appui facial latéral sur une extrém., trans- 11. 12.
latéral. à l’appui latéral (3/3). port latéral sauté par-dessus les 2 arçons à
Circles with any hop travel fwd. in side support Circles with any hop tr. fwd. 2x in side support l’appui dors. latéral sur l’autre extrém.
(1/3). (3/3). From side sup. frontways on one end, travel hop
Molinos con desplazamiento adelante de salto Molinos con desplazamiento ad. de salto 2 over both p. to side sup. frontways on other end
al apoyo lateral. veces al apoyo lateral (3/3). (1-2 to 4-5).
De ap. facial lat sobre un extremo, desplaza-
miento lat. saltado por encima de los 2 arcos
al apoyo frontal lat. sobre el otro extremo.
13. Cercles de jambes avec transport arrière à l’appui 14. Cercles de jambes avec transport arrière à l’appui 15. Cercles de jambes avec transport arrière à 16. De l’appui latéral sur 1 extrême, transport arr. 17. 18.
latéral. latéral (3/3). l’appui latéral (3/3), mains entre les arçons. par-dessus les 2 arçons à l’appui lat. sur l’autre
Circles with travel bwd. in side support. Circles with travel bwd. in side support (3/3). Circles with travel bwd. in side support (3/3), extrémité (3/3) entre 2 cercles de jambes.
Molinos con desplazamiento atrás al apoyo Molinos con desplazamientos atrás al apoyo hands between pommels. From side sup. on 1 end., travel bwd. over both p.
lateral. lateral (3/3). Molinos con desplazamiento atrás al apoyo to side sup. on the other end (3/3) in 2 circles w.
lateral (3/3), manos entre los arcos. Del apoyo lat. sobre 1 extremo, desplazamiento
atrás por encima de los 2 arcos al apoyo lateral
sobre el otro extremo (3/3) en 2 molinos.
19. 20. Cercles des jambes avec transport arriére 21. Cercles des jambes avec transport arr sauté 2x. 22. De l’appui latéral sur une extr., transport lat. 23. De l’appui latéral à côté des arçons, transport lat. 24.
sauté. Circles with travel bwd. with hop 2x. sauté par-dessus l. 2 arçons à l’appui facial sauté par-dessus l. 2 arçons à l’appui fac. lat. à
Circles with travel bwd. with hop. Molinos con desplazamiento atrás de salto 2 latéral sur l’autre extrém. (1-2 a 4-5). côté des arçons sur l’autre extrém. (1-1 a 5-5).
Molino con desplazamiento atrás de salto. veces. From side support on one end, travel hop over From side sup. beside the p., travel hop o. 2 p.
both p. to sup. frways on other end (1-2 to 4-5). to sup. fwd on other end (1-1 to 5-5).
De apoyo facial lat. sobre un extremo, desplaz. De ap. lat. al lado del arco, desplaz. lat saltado
lateral saltando por encima de los 2 arcos al por encima de los 2 arcos al ap. facial lat al lado
apoyo facial lat. sobre el otro extremo (1-2 a del arco sobre el otro extremo (1-1 a 5-5).
4-5).
(Yamawaki)
Code MAG 2021 72

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
do Krolls, Tong Fei, Wu Guonian, Roth desplazamientos con giro.
25. 26. Tout transport avec ½ pivot à l’appui transversal 27. Tout transport avec ½ pivot à l’appui transversal 28. 29. D’une extrémité, transport latéral avec 2 et ½ 30.
(1/3 transport). (½ ou 2/3 transport). pivot sur l’autre extrémité.
All travels with ½ spindle in cross support (1/3 All travels with ½ spindle in cross support (½ From an end side travel with 2x ½ spindle to
travel). or 2/3 travel). other end.
Todo desplazamiento con ½ pívot en apoyo Todo desplazamiento con ½ pívot en apoyo Desde un final, desplazamiento lateral con dos
transversal (desplazamiento 1/3 ). transversal (desplazamiento ½ o 2/3). ½ pívot, al otro final.
31. 32. Cercles des jambes avec transport avant ou 33. Tout transport avec ½ pivot. 34. Transport transversal avant 3/3 avec ½ pivot 35. Transport 3/3 avec ½ pivot par-dessus les deux 36.
arrière avec ¼ pivot à l’appui latéral. All travels with ½ spindle in side support. sur un arçon par-dessus l’autre arçon. arçons.
Travel fwd. or bwd. with ¼ spindle to side support. Todo, desplazamiento con ½ pívot en apoyo Cross travel fwd. 3/3 with ½ Spindle from one Travel 3/3 over both pommels with ½ Spindle.
Molinos con desplazamiento adelante o atrás lateral. pommel over the other pommel. Desplazamiento 3/3 sobre los dos arcos con
con ¼ pívot al apoyo lateral. Desplazamiento ad. en apoyo transversal 3/3 ½ pívot.
con ½ pivot desde un arco sobre el otro arco.
(Nin Reyes) (Nin Reyes 2)
37. 38. 39. 40. 41. Transport av. (3/3) en appui transv. av. saut. 42. Transport av. (3/3) en appui transv. av. saut.
3/3 cross support travel fwd. with hop. Travel 3/3 cross support travel fwd. with hop.
forward in cross support over both pommels. Desplazamiento ad. (3/3) en apoyo transversal
Desplazamiento ad. (3/3) en apoyo transversal adelante de salto.
adelante de salto.
(Driggs)
43. 44. Transport avant en appui transversal (½ ou 2/3). 45. Transport av. avec appui sur le cheval. sur chaque 46. Tout autre transport av. sur l’autre extrém. (3/3). 47. 48.
Travel fwd. in cross support (½ or 2/3). arc. et sur l’autre extrémité. (3/3) (1-2-4-5). Any other travel fwd. in cross support to other
Desplazamiento ad. en ap. transversal (½ o 2/3). Travel fwd. in cross support with support on end (3/3).
leather, pommel, pommel, leather(3/3) (1-2-4-5). Todo desplazamiento ad. sobre el otro extremo
Desplazamiento adelante con apoyo sobre el (3/3).
caballo sobre cada arco y sobre el otro extremo (Magyar)
(3/3) (1-2-4-5).
Code MAG 2021 73

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. De l’appui transv. sur 1 extr., transp. av. dans 2 52. 53. Transport av. (3/3) en appui transv. av. avec les 54.
cercles d. jambes sur le 1er. arçon, sur le 2e. arçon jambes écartées.
avec ¼ t. sur l’aut. extrém. à l’appui lat. (3/3). 3/3 cross support travel fwd. in flairs.
Fr. cr. sup. on end, tr. fwd. in 2 circles to 1st p., to Desplazamiento ad. (3/3) en apoyo transversal
2nd p., with ¼ turn to side sup. on other end (3/3). adelante con piernas abiertas.
Del apoyo transversal sobre 1 extremo, despla-
zar ad. en 2 molinos sobre el 1er arco, sobre el
2º arco con ¼ g. sobre el otro extremo. (3/3).
(Bilozerchev)
55. Cercle des jambes avec transport en arriéré 56. Transport arriéré en appui transversal (½ ou 57. Transport arrière avec appui sur le cheval. sur 58. Tout autre transport ar. sur l’autre extrém. (3/3). 59. Transport arr. en appui transv. av. saut au 60.
en appui transversal d’une partie du cheval ou 2/3). chaque arc. et sur l’autre extr. (3/3) (5-4-2-1). Any other travel bwd. in cross support to other dessus des 2 arçons.
arçon à l’autre (⅓). Travel bwd. in cross support (½ or 2/3). Travel bwd. in cross sup with support on leather, end (3/3). Travel backward in cross support over both
Travel bwd. in cross sup. from one horse part Desplazamiento atrás en apoyo transversal (½ pommel, pommel, leather(3/3) (5-4-2-1). Todo desplazamiento atrás hacia el otro extre- pommels.
or pommel to another (⅓). o 2/3). Desplazamiento atrás con ap. sobre el caballo mo (3/3.). Desplazamiento at. en apoyo transversal sobre
(Sivado)
Molino con desplaz. atrás en ap. transversal de sobre cada arco y sobre el otro extremo (3/3) los dos arcos.
una parte del caballo u arco al otro (⅓). (5-4-2-1). (Kurbanov)
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. Tout autre transport arriere sur l’autre extrém. 66.
(3/3) cercles écartées.
Any other travel bwd. in cross support to other
end (3/3) in flairs.
Todo desplazamiento atrás hacia el otro extre-
mo (3/3.) molinos piernas abiertas.
67. 68. 69. De l’appui sur 1 extrême, double dors. par- 70. Passé dorsal av., Stöckli renv., passé dorsal av. 71. 72.
dessus le 1er arçon Stöckli arr. par-dessus le Kehre fwd., rev. Stöckli, kehre fwd.
2e arçon à l’appui latéral, arçon entre les mains. Pase dorsal ad., Stöckli inv., pase dorsal ad.
From support on end, kehr fwd. around 1st p., rev.
Stöckli around 2nd p. to side sup., p. betw. hands.
Del apoyo sobre 1 extr., doble dorsal por encima (Moguilny)
del 1er arco, Stöckli invertida sobre el 2º en
apoyo lat. arco entre las manos, desde apoyo
lat. usando 1 o 2 manos.
(Urzica)
Code MAG 2021 74

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. 75. 76. Passé dorsal arrière, passé dorsal av., passé 77. 78.
dorsal arrière.
Kehre bwd., kehre fwd., kehre bwd.
Pase dorsal atrás, pase dorsal adelante, pase
dorsal atrás.
(Belenki)
79. 80. 81. De l’appui sur 1 arçon, double fac. russe d’une 82. Depuis l’appui à l’extr., transport facial russe en 83. 84.
extr. à l’autre sans appui sur et entre les arçons avant jusqu’à l’autre extrémité sans appui sur ou
(ap. lat. au lat., transv. au lat.). autre les arçons (latéral. à lat., transv. à lat., lat.
From sup. on 1 p., Russian wendeswing fwd. to -à transv., transv. à transv.).
other end without sup. on or btw. the p. (side to From sup. on end, Russian wendeswing fwd. to
side support, side to cross support). From sup. other end without sup. on or btw. the p. (side to
1 -2., 3/3 travel in Russian type wendeswing side support, side to cross, cross to side, cross
with 630° or more turning. to cross).
Del ap. en 1 arco., doble facial rusa de un extr. Del apoyo en el extr., doble facial rusa de un extr.
al otro sin apoyo sobre o entre los arcos (ap. al otro sin apoyo sobre o entre los arcos (lat. - lat.,
lat a lat., transversal a lat. o lat. a transversal). lat. - transv., transv. - lateral, transv. - transv.).
D (next Wu Guoniang)
85. 86. 87. De l’appui lat. avec l’arçon entre les mains, facial 88. Tout facial russe avec 360° t. et transport 3/3. 89. Tout transport 3/3 dans Facial russe avec 720° 90.
russe 360º avec transp. à l’autre extrém. Any Russian wend. with 360° t. and 3/3 travel. ou plus tours.
From side support pommel between hand, rus- Toda rusa facial con 360° g. y desplaz. 3/3. Any 3/3 travel in Russian type wendeswing with
sian wendeswing 360º with travel to the other 720° or more turning.
end in side support. (NEW distribution table) Todo desplazamiento 3/3 en rusa facial con
Desde apoyo lat. arco entre manos, rusa 360º 720° o más giros.
(Roth)
con despl. al otro extremo en apoyo lateral. (Wu Guonian)
(Kroll)
91. 92. 93. 94. Stöckli inversé de l’appui transversal dans une 95. Sur le cheval, en appui transversal, facial russe 96.
arçon a l’autre. avec 360º or 540º au - dessus les arçons.
Reverse Stöckli from cross support on one end On the leather, from cross support, Russian
to the other. wendeswing with 360° or 540º over both pom-
Stöckli invertida desde apoyo longitudinal en mels.
un extremo al otro. En el cuerpo, desde apoyo transversal, rusa
facial con 360º o 540º por encima de los dos
arcos.
(Vammen)
Code MAG 2021 75

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG IV: Sorties - Dismounts - Salidas
1. Facial allemand (du cercle ou cercle jambes 2. Chaguinian suivi de facial allemand. 3. 4. Sur l’extrémité, cercles ou cercles écartées par 5. SDA a l’appui renversé 3/3 avec 450º ou plus. 6.
écartées). Chaguinian to wende. l’appui renverse avec 3/3 transport et 450°ou plus t. DSA to hdst. 3/3 with 450º or more turn.
Wende (from circle or flair). Chaguinian seguida de alemana facial. From side sup. on end, circle or flair to hdst. and SDA al apoyo invertido 3/3 con 450º o más.
Alemana facial (desde Molino o Molino piernas travel 3/3 with 450° or more turn.
abiertas). Sobre el extremo, molino o molino p. ab. por el
ap. inv. con desplaz. 3/3 y 450° o más giros.
(Kolyvanov)
7. 8. Sur l’extr., double facial russe avec 360° ou 540°. 9. Sur l’extr., double fac. russe avec 720°ou 900°. 10. Sur l’extr., double facial russe avec 1080° ou plus. 11. 12.
On the end, Russian wendeswing with 360° or 540°. On the end, Russian wend. with 720° or 900°. On the end, Russian wendeswing with 1080º or
Sobre el extremo, rusa facial 360° o 540°. Sobre el extremo, rusa facial 720° o 900º. more.
Sobre el extremo, rusa facial 1080° o más.
13. 14. De l’appui facial latéral, passé facial av. avec ½ 15. Stöckli inv. ou SDA o cercle dans une arçon par 16. SDA avec saut arr. par l’app. renvs. sur l’autre extr. 17. 18.
t. à l’appui facial latéral et facial allemand. l’app. renverse. DSA with hop bwd. through hdst. on other end.
Fr. s. sup. fw., wendeswing fwd. w. ½ t. to sup. DSA, rev. Stöckli or circle on one pommel SDA con salto atrás por el apoyo invertido sobre
fw. followed by Schwabenflank a. wende off. through hdst. el otro extremo.
Del ap. facial lat., pase facial adelante con ½ g. Stöckli inv. o SDA o molino en un arco por el ap
al apoyo facial lateral y alemana facial. inv.
(Jessen)
19. 20. Cercle d. jambes ou cercle éc. par l’appui renvs. 21. Cercle des jambes ou cercle écarté et transport 22. 23. 24.
(aussi avec ¾ t. avec ou sans transport). sauté arrière par l’appui renversé.
Circle or flair through hdst. (also with ¾ t. with Circle or flair with hop travel bwd. thr. hdst.
or without travel). Molino o molino piernas abiertas y desplaza-
Molino o molino p. abierto por el apoyo invertido miento de salto atrás por el apoyo invertido.
(también con ¾ g. con o sin desplazamiento).
Code MAG 2021 76

Section 12: Rings
Height: 280 cm from the floor.

An exercise on the Rings is composed of swing, strength and hold
parts in approximately equal portions. These parts and combinations
are executed in a hang position, to or through a support position, and
to or through the handstand position, and execution with straight arms
should be predominant. Contemporary Rings gymnastic exercises
are characterized by transitions between elements of swing and
strength or the reverse where execution with straight arms should
predominate.. The swinging of the cables and the crossing of the
cables are not permitted.
1. From a still stand, the gymnast must jump or be assisted to a still
hang on the Rings with legs together and with good form. The
evaluation begins the moment his feet leave the floor with the first
movement of the gymnast from the moment he leaves the floor.
The coach is not permitted to give the gymnast an initial swing.
2. The gymnast must include only elements that he can perform
with complete safety and a high degree of aesthetic and techni-
cal mastery. An exercise must start in a hang position with arms
vertical and straight. The gymnast must NOT bend their arms in
moving to the first element unless specifically needed for the ele-
ment completion. Example: Cast up and underswing backward
may be started with bent arms at any time during an exercise.
3. All exercises should contain an approximately equal distribution
of swing, hold and strength elements. Consequently, an exercise
cannot include more than three elements from groups II and/or III
in direct succession. Straight arms must be used whenever the
nature of the element permits. Elements that can be performed
with bent arms are described in the element tables. A gymnast
may only bend their arms during a transition between elements
when necessary to properly perform the next element.(FROM D
SECTION)
4. During swings to a hold position or strength presses, the shoulders
and/or body may not rise above the perfect hold position. This
deduction is different from the deduction for final hold position.
Example: Uprise bwd to cross at 25º and lower to hold position at
10º = 0.3 + 0.1 deduction. (FROM D SECTION)
5. Back swings in support that do not lead to at least a value part
but simply reverse direction and swing back down in or to a lower
hang position will be deducted re deducted by the E-jury. A typi-
cal Example: of such a layaway on rings is: from a Kip to support,
Code MAG 2021 77

swing back to layaway to front uprise.
6. Compositional errors with deductions of 0.3. Example: Honma to
support then lift to L sit OR straddle L sit to L sit.
7. For the hold of non-listed parts for more than 2 seconds, will be
deducted each time. Examples include: inverted pike, dorsal and
inverted hang.
8. Additional Technical, aesthetic and execution aspects in the exer-
cise construction expectations are:
a) Hold positions must be reached directly, with straight arms,
and without need for positional or postural corrections.
b) All hold positions must be held for a minimum of 2 seconds.
MOVED TO GENERAL PART COVERING BOTH D AND E
POINTS
c) Upward swings must lead to or through a handstand, or directly
to a strength hold element whenever the nature of the swing
permits.
d) During all swing to strength hold elements, the shoulders
may not rise above the level of the final hold position. Any
deviation will result in the appropriate deductions by the E-
jury and, depending on the nature of the element, may lead to
non-recognition by the D-jury. MOVED TO GENERAL PART
COVERING BOTH D AND E POINTS
e) Swing elements that lead to strength hold elements which must
reverse direction (i.e. front uprise to Swallow; front uprise to
inverted cross and so on…) will be counted as two elements.
MOVED TO D SECTION AS NO RELEVANCE TO E
b) A false grip (over grip) for strength holds is not permitted. A
false grip is performed when the wrists are bent in order to
gain an advantage in performing a strength element, deduction
-0.1 each time.
No false grip, is performed with straight straight wrists with or
without the fingers of the hands wrapped around the Rings.
Note: The position of the rings in the hands (with straight wrists
and open hands) does not change the evaluation (no false
grip).
g) Straight arms must be used whenever the nature of the ele-
ment permits it. MOVED TO POINT 3
h) Composition errors with deductions of -0,30 points. Example:
Honma to support then lift to L sit OR Straddle L sit to L sit
OR Kip to support then L sit, etc. MOVED TO POINT 5
c) Only For strength elements to handstand with bent arms,
where the necessary technique requires minimal touching of
the straps with the lower arms, no deduction should be taken
for contact with the straps (Elements II.25 and II.26 - only with
bent arms).
6. Yamawaki/Jonasson elements showing a full support no inter-
ruption in swing or pause will receive a 0.5 deduction for swing
with strength (receiving non-recognition). These elements with
less support shown will be recognized with small and medium
deductions for swing with strength. ADDED TO GENERAL PART
7. Gymnasts demonstrating very little change in body position after
moving from one hold position to another are subject to execution
deductions and possible non-recognition (i.e: Swallow to support
scale and Hanging scale rearways to Swallow).ADDED TO GEN-
ERAL PART COVERING BOTH D AND E POINTS
Code MAG 2021 78
and 12.3.

I. Kip and swing elements & swings through or to handstand
(2 sec.).
II. Strength elements and hold elements (2 sec.).
III. Swing to Strength hold elements (2 sec.).
IV. Dismounts.
2. One Swing to handstand element (2 s. hold) is required in the
exercise and must be inside 10 counting elements and inside the
8 counting elements for Juniors.
3. Repeated elements (same Code Identification Number)
a) Repeated elements cannot contribucannot contribute to the “D”
score. On Rings, this rule is extended so that not more than 3
elements from groups II and/or III can be presented in direct
succession. The 4th and subsequent Elements from Group II
and/or III of the same sequence will be considered as repetition,
and not recognized by the D jury.
b) If the gymnast decides to execute more elements from Element
Groups II and/or III, in order to be recognized by the “D” Jury, he
must perform at least a B value swing element from elements
Group I (except any kind of kip/back kip, or element in the same
Code box) between the first sequence of maximum 3, and an-
other element or sequence from Element Groups II and/or III.
This swing element of at least a B value must be recognised
and among the 10 best counting elements.
c) All elements performed from EGII or EGIII contribute to this rule
whether they are inside the counting ten elements or not, even
if the element is not recognised due to poor technical execution.
This swing element of at least a B value must be among the 10
best counting element for recognition. move to b
a) Repeated elements (same Code Identification Number) cannot
contribute to the “D” score. On Rings, this rule is extended so
that a maximum of 1 final strength position in each EG may be
recognized for difficulty. Thus, for example only two cross type
elements (regular, L cross, or V cross) or support scale type
elements (regular or straddled) are permitted in an exercise for
difficulty value (one in Group II and one in Group III).
b) A maximum of 2 Guczoghy and a maximum of 2 Li Ning type
elements can be present in the exercise.
c) Basic support positions, i.e. L sit and V sit are not included in
the special repetition rule as they are deemed to be different
strength elements. Therefore, a gymnast can perform It is pos-
sible to perform uprise to forward to L sit and uprise forward to V
sit. However, it would not be possible They would not, however,
be able to perform more than one final strength position in each
element group, i.e. Kip to L sit and uprise to L sit would not be
possible.
5. Additional information and regulations: ADDED TO GENERAL
PART COVERING BOTH D AND E POINTS.
a) Strength holds positions that deviate from the correct body,
arm or leg position by greater than 45’ will not be recognised.
Examples: Cross with shoulder angle >45’, support scale with
Code MAG 2021 79
hip bend of >45
b) Strength presses and lifts which follow a previous hold element
and end in a 2 second hold position are recognized only if the
preceding hold part has been recognized and if a stop position
is shown.
c) Swing elements that lead to strength hold elements witch must
reverse direction (i.e. front uprise to Swallow; front uprise to
inverted cross and so on ...) will be counted as two elements.
g) Elements with crossing of the cables or to “Lining” hanging
position are not permitted, being deducted as composition
errors.
f) For juniors, elements which include saltos backward in hang
and Li Ning type elements are not permitted.
e) Pineda type elements must be executed with straight body,
straight arms, a momentary hold in the front lever and slowly
to avoid deduction or classification as a swing to strength
element.
f) Yamawaki/Jonasson elements showing a full support will
not be recognized for difficulty. A Honma to support and fwd.
swing out to hang will not be recognized as separate values
because of the gymnast’s intent. ADDED TO GENERAL PART
g) Final hold positions can be recognised even if there are large
deductions in previous element. For exemple: Salto forward
between Rings directly to cross with an entry position over
45º, will not be recognised for difficulty but value for final cross
would be awarded. No partial value may be given due to the
gymnasts’ intent. ADDED TO GENERAL PART COVERING
BOTH D AND E POINTS
d) All V hold positions (2 sec.) must be performed with legs verti-
cal. This is the same as the requirement for Floor Exercise.
i) An exercise must start in a hang position with arms vertical
and straight. The gymnast may NOT bend their arms in mov-
ing to the first position unless specifically needed for element
completion. Example: Cast up and underswing backward may
be started with bent arms any time during an exercise. Moved
to E points
j) During an exercise, a gymnast may only bend their arms dur-
ing a transition between elements when necessary to properly
perform the next element. Moved to E points
k) For the hold of a non-listed part for 2 seconds or more, deduct
-0.1 each time. Some elements typically featuring this problem
(hold of 2 sec. or more) include: inverted hang, inverted pike,
and dorsal hang. Moved to E points
l) Nakayama type elements must pass through a complete
hanging scale rearways to prevent execution deductions
and potential non-recognition. ADDED TO GENERAL PART
e) A dorsal hang to Cross or V Cross is not an acceptable entry
position to elevate the value for either cross (or any other
strength element). If either cross is performed directly from a
dorsal hang, each will retain its independent Code of Points
value (B and C respectively).
n) One Swing to handstand element (2 s. hold) is required in the
exercise and must be inside 10 counting elements and inside
the 8 counting elements for Juniors. MOVE TO THE BEGIN
Code MAG 2021 80

Article 12.2.3 Element Performance applicable to D & E score –
1. All hold positions must be held for a minimum of 2 seconds. A hold
is achieved when the whole body reaches a static position including
the shoulders and feet. A hold part will not be recognised by the
D jury for Difficulty and/or Element Group requirement if no stop
is shown.
2. Jonasson/Yamawaki type elements should be performed with
continuous movement and with shoulders above Ring height. If a
clear support phase is shown the element will not be recognised
and receive 0.5 deduction. In this case, the element cannot be split
into Honma and fwd swing to hang. These elements performed
with a slight pause or interruption will be recognised but with a
medium or small deduction.
3. During swings to a hold positions or during strength presses, the
shoulders and/or the body may not rise above the perfect hold
position. If the deviation from perfect position is greater than 45º
the element will not be recognised and receive 0.5 deduction. In
this case, the final hold position CAN be recognised if performed
to the technical requirements. Example:
- Salto fwd. to cross with an entry position above 45º will receive a
0.5 deduction and a B value for the cross if performance criteria
is fulfilled.
- From cross press above 45º to swallow will receive a 0.5 de-
duction and a D value for the swallow if performance criteria is
fulfilled.
4. Gymnasts demonstrating very little change in body position when
moving from one hold position to another are subject to execution
deductions and possible non-recognition. Example: Swallow press
to support scale.
4. During swings to handstands or swing to a hold positions, the
lowering of legs, from the initial entry position, of greater than 45’
will lead to non-recognition and receive 0.5 deduction.
5. A strength press from hang or Pineda type elements must be
performed slowly, with straight arms and a straight body to avoid
deduction or classification as swing to strength. If an arm bend
of greater than 45º is shown the element will not be recognised
and receive 0.5 deduction. See Article 9.2.4.8 for other angular
deductions
6. A Swallow should be performed in a horizontal position, with a
perfectly straight body and with the bottom of the shoulders in line
with the bottom of the Rings. The arms should be wide and with
no contact to the upper body. Touching of the arms will lead to a
small deduction, clear support of the body with the arms a medium
deduction.
7. A support scale will be recognised if the shoulder is completely
above the top of Rings. The body should be in a perfectly straight
horizontal position. The position of the arms, i.e. slightly wide or
hands turned out does not define the value of the element.
8. Nakayama type elements must pass through a complete hanging
scale rearwards to prevent execution deductions and potential
non-recognition
9. When performing a press from one hold position to another hold
position the expectation is to see a distinct movement of the body
(more than a body width). If the press does not commence from
a perfect position the element will be subject to execution deduc-
tions. If there is a minimal body movement (width of body) (less
than 15º) only the final hold element will be recognised. Example:
Hanging scale rearwards press to swallow.
Code MAG 2021 81
Article 12.3 Specific Deductions for Rings
D Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
No swing to handstand. +
More than 2 times element Guc- +

zoghy or 2 times element Li Ning. and non-recognition by the D-jury
E Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Legs apart or other poor execu-
+
tion during jump or lift to Rings.
Pre-swing before start of exer-
+
cise. General part rings
Coach gives gymnast an initial
+
swing.
Layaway on the back swing. +
Crossing cables during any

+
element.
Hold of a non-listed part for 2 s. each
or more. time
Compositional errors. +
Legs apart or other poor execu-
+
tion during jump or lift to Rings.
False grip (over grip) during
strength holds (each time). +
Bent arms during swing to

strength hold parts or to estab- + + +
lish hold position.
Bent arms during hold and
+ + +
press to strength hold elements.
Touching cables or straps with
+
arms, feet or other parts of body
Supporting or balancing with +
feet or legs on cables. no-recog
Fall from handstand. +
no-recog
Excessive swing of cables. per
element
Preceding strength hold high
angle- press to strength (also + +
apply to 2nd element).
Touching or support of arms
against body during Swallow + +
Code MAG 2021 82

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Bascules et éléments d’élan, élans pour ou à l’appui renversé (2 s.).- Kip and swing elements & swings through or to handstand - Básculas y elementos de impulso e impulsos al o por el apoyo invertido.
1. Établissement avant à l’appui. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Uprise fwd. to support.
Dominación adelante al apoyo.
7. Depuis toute position en appui, de l’hirondelle 8. #1 et contre-salto av. à l’élan en arrière par la susp. 9. 10. 11. 12.
ou d’élan arrière à l’appui, roulé en avant à la (aussi de Li Ning).
suspension. #1 and counter salto fwd. to bwd swing in hang.
From any support scale, swallow or swing bwd (also from Li Ning).
in support, fall roll forward to bwd swing in hang. #1 y contra salto ad. a impulso atrás por la susp.
Desde cualquier plancha hirondelle o impulso (también desde Li Ning).
atrás al apoyo a impulso atrás por la suspensión.
(Chechi)
(Csollány)
13. De la suspension, élan avec épaules par-des- 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
sus l’anneaux.
From hang, underswing w. shoulders above
rings.
Desde la suspensión, impulso con los hombros
por encima de las anillas.
(Nakayama)
19. 20. De la susp., ou l’appui renversement arr. à la 21. 22. 23. 24.
susp. dors., etablis. av. à l’appui.
From a hang or support, back toss to hang rw.
to uprise fwd. to support.
De la suspensión invertida o el apoyo at. a la
susp. dorsal.
(Li Ning)
(Li Ning 2)
Interdit pour junior / Prohibited for junior / Prohibido para junior Code MAG 2021 83
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Établissement en avant en tournant en arrière 26. Établissement en avant en tournant en arrière 27. Double tour d’appui arrière groupé à la susp. 28. Double tour d’appui arrière carpé à la susp. 29. Double tour d’appui arrière tendu à la susp. 30.
à l’appui. bras tendu par l’appui renversé. Tucked double felge bwd. to hang. Piked double felge bwd. to hang. Stretched double felge bwd. to hang.
From hang, felge upward to support. Swing fwd. with straight arms through hdst. Doble giro de apoyo atrás ag. a la suspensión. Doble giro de apoyo atrás en carpa a la susp. Doble giro de apoyo atrás extendido a la susp.
Dominación adelante volteando atrás al apoyo. Dominación adelante volteando atrás al apoyo
invertido.
(Guczoghy)
(O’Neill)
31. Renversement arriéré carpé ou tendu. 32. Établissement en avant en tournant en arrière à 33. 34. 35. 36.
Dislocate bwd. piked or stretched. l’appui jambes éc appuyées sur les poignets (2 s.).
Dislocación atrás agrupada o en carpa. Felge upward to support with straddled legs
supported above the rings (2 s.).
Dominación adelante voltear atrás al apoyo p.
abiertas apoyadas sobre las muñecas (2 s.).
(Deltchev)
37. Établissement arrière à l’appui. 38. Établissement arr. ou grand tour c. ou tendu par 39. 40. 41. 42.
Uprise bwd. to support. l’app. renvs.
Dominación at. al apoyo. Uprise bwd. or giant swing piked or str. through
handstand.
Dom. at. o molino carp. o ext. por el ap. inv.
43. Renversement avant carpé ou tendu. 44. Élancer en suspension en arrière, renverse- 45. Honma tendu. 46. 47. 48.
Inlocate piked or stretched. ment avant à l’appui. Honma stretched.
Dislocación adelante en carpa o extendido. Backward swing to salto fwd. p. to support. Honma ext.
Lanzarse en suspensión atrás dislocando ad.
al apoyo.
(Honma)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. De la suspension, renversement avant lente- 50. 51. Double salto d’appui avant gr. à la suspension. 52. Double salto d’appui avant ca. ou tendu à la susp. 53. 54.
ment. Double salto fwd. tucked to hang. Double salto fwd. piked or stretched to hang.
Slow inlocate from hang. Doble mortal de apoyo adelante agrupado a la Doble mortal de apoyo ad. en carpa o ext. a la susp.
De la suspensión dislocación adelante. suspensión. (Jonasson)
(Yamawaki)
55. Bascule à l’appui. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60.

Kip to support.
Kippe al apoyo.
61. Bascule dorsale à l’appui. 62. Bascule dorsale bras tendus à l’appui. 63. 64. 65. 66.
Back kip with bent arms to support. Back kip with straight arms to support.
Báscula dorsal al apoyo. Báscula dorsal brazos extendidos al apoyo.
67. Élan av. à l’élan arrière en suspension. 68. Établissement arrière à l’équerre écartée (2 s.). 69. De l’appui, salto av. gr. ou carpé à l’appui. 70. 71. 72.
Fwd. swing to swing bwd. in hang. Uprise bwd. to straddled L-sit (2 s.). Bwd. swing, salto fwd tuck or piked to support.
Impulso ad. a impulso atrás a la suspensión. Dominación atrás a ángulo piernas abiertas (2 s.). Del apoyo mortal ad. agr. o en carpa al apoyo.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. De l’appui ou de la croix tour d’appui arrière 74. 75. 76. 77. 78.
carpé ou tendu à l’appui.
From support or cross, felge bwd. piked or
stretched with bent arms to support.
Desde el apoyo o cristo, giro de apoyo atrás en
carpa o extendido al apoyo.
79. 80. Bascule dorsale or tour d’appui arrière tendu à 81. Établissement en avant en tournant en arrière 82. 83. 84.
l’appui renversé. (2 s.). bras tendu à l’appui renversé (2 s.).
Back kip or roll bwd str. with bent arms to hand- Swing fwd. or giant swing fwd with straight arms
stand (2 s.). to hdst. (2 s.).
Báscula dorsal o giro de ap. at ext. al ap. inv. (2 s.). Impulso ad. o molino atrás b. ext. al ap. invertido
(2 s.).
85. 86. 87. Établissement arrière ou grand tour à l’appui 88. 89. 90.
renversement avec bras tendu (2 s.).
Uprise bwd. or giant swing to handstand with
straight arms (2 s.).
Molino adelante (2 s.).
91. 92. De l’appui élan à l’appui renversé (2 s.). 93. Honma et élan à l’appui renversé (2 s.). 94. Honma tendu et élan à l’appui renversé (2 s.). 95. 96.
From support swing bwd. to handstand (2 s.). Honma and swing bwd. to handstand (2 s.). Honma str. and swing bwd. to handstand (2 s.).
Desde apoyo impulso al apoyo invertido (2 s.). Honma e impulso al apoyo invertido (2 s.). Honma ext. e impulso al apoyo invertido (2 s.).
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG II: Éléments de force et maintien (2 s.) - Strength elements and hold elements (2 sec.) - Elementos de fuerza y mantenimiento (2 seg.)
1. Équerre (2 s.) ou équerre écartée (2 s.). 2. Équerre, jambes levées vert. (2 s.). 3. Croix renversée (2 s.). 4. De la croix renvs., s’élev à l’appui renvs. (2 s.). 5. 6.
L-sit (2 s.) or straddled L-sit (2 s.). V-sit (2 s.). Inverted cross (2 s.). Press from inverted cross to handstand (2 s.).
Ángulo (2 s.) o ángulo piernas abiertas (2 s.). Ángulo, piernas elevadas verticalmente (2 s.). Cristo invertido (2 s.). De cristo inv., elev. al apoyo invertido (2 s.).
7. Suspension dorsale horizontale (2 s.). 8. Appui facial horizontal éc. (2 s.). 9. Appui facial horizontal (2 s.). 10. App. fac. horiz. entre les ann. (hirondelle) (2 s.). 11. Hirondelle inversée (2 s.). 12.
Hanging scale rearways (back lever) (2 s.). Support scale straddled (2 s.). Support scale (planche)(2 s.). Support scale at ring height (swallow or maltese Inverted swallow (2 s.).
Suspensión dorsal horizontal (2 s.). Apoyo facial horizontal piernas abiertas (2 s.). Apoyo facial horizontal (2 s.). cross) (2 s.). Hirondelle invertida (2 s.).
Apoyo facial horizontal entre las anillas (2 s.).
(Hirondelle)
13. Suspension faciale horizontale (2 s.). 14. Toutes croix (2 s.). 15. Équerre, jambes levées vert. (2 s.). 16. 17. 18.
Hanging scale frontways (front lever) (2 s.). Any cross (2 s.). V cross (2 s.).
Suspensión facial horizontal (2 s.). Cualquier cristo (2 s.). Cristo en ángulo p. verticales (2 s.).
19. 20. 21. 22. Équerre, jambes levées vert. à équerre, jambes 23. Établissement en force, bras tendus équerre, 24.
levées vert. (2 s.). jambes levées vert. (2 s.).
V Cross, press to V-sit (2 sec.). Vertical pull up with str. arms to V-cross (2 s.).
De cristo p. vert. subir a ángulo p. vert. (2 s.) Subir vert. brazos ext. a ángulo p. vert. (2 s.)
(Tsukahara 3) (Colak)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. S’élever corps et bras fléchis à l’appui renvs. (2 s). 26. S’élev. corps t. et bras fl. ou corps fl. et bras t. 27. S’élev. corps tendu et bras tendus ou de 28. De l’hirondelle, s’élever corps tendu et bras t. 29. Pineda à la croix renverse (2 s.). 30.
Press to hdst. with bent body and bent arms (2 s). ou de l’app. fac. horiz. éc. à l’app. renv. (2 s.). l’appui fac. horiz. à l’appui renversé (2 s.). a l’appui renversé (2 s.). Pineda to inverted Cross (2 s.).
Elevarse cuerpo y b. flex. al apoyo inv. (2 s). Press to hdst. with str. body a. bent arms or b. Press to hdst. with str. body and str. arms or Press to hdst. with str. body and str. arms from Pineda a cristo invertido (2 s.).
body. a. str. arms, or fr. strad. sup. lever (2 s.). from sup. lever (2 s.). swallow (2 s.).
Elev. cuerpo ext. y b. flex. o cuerpo ext. y b. flex. Elevarse cuerpo y b. ext. al apoyo invertido o Elevarse cuerpo ext. y brazos ext. desde (Petrounias)
o del ap. fac. horiz. p. ab. al apoyo inv. (2 s.). del apoyo facial horizontal (2 s.). hirondelle al ap. invertido (2 s.).
- Aussi jambes écartés

- Also straddle legs.
- También piernas abiertas * Aussi jam. ec./ also strad. legs / También p. ab.
31. Tour d’appui av. lentement carpé à l’appui. 32. Tour d’appui av. lentement tendu à l’appui. 33. Tour d’appui av. tendu lentement, bras tendus 34. Tour d’appui av. tendu lentement, bras tendus 35. 36.
Slow roll fwd. piked with bent arms, to support. Slow roll fwd. stretched with bent arms, to à l’appui renverse. (2 s.). à la croix renverse. (2 s.).
Giro de apoyo ad. lentamente en carpa al apo- support. Slow roll fwd. stretched with straight arms to Slow roll fwd. stretched with straight arms to
yo. Giro de apoyo ad. lentamente ext. al apoyo. handstand (2 s.). inverted cross (2 s.).
Giro de apoyo ad. ext lentamente, brazos exten- Giro de apoyo ad ext. brazos ext. lentamente a
didos al apoyo invertido (2 s.). cristo invertido (2 s.).
37. 38. Abaissement arriéré en tournant lentement, 39. Tour d’appui av. tendu lentement (bras tendu ou 40. Etablis. en force bras et corps tendus en passant 41. Pineda à la croix jambes levées en V (2 s.). 42.
bras et corps tendus,à équerre écarté (2 s.). fléchi), à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). par la susp. fac. h. à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). Pineda to V cross (2 s.).
Slow roll bwd. slowly with str. arms and straight. Slow roll fwd. stretched (bent or straight arms) Pull with straight arms and body through mo- Pineda a cristo en V (2 s.)
body to L sit (2 s.). to cross or L-cross (2 s.). mentary front lever to cross or L-cross (2 s.).
Giro lento de apoyo atrás con brazos y cuerpo Giro lento de apoyo adelante cuerpo (brazos ext. Domin. a fuerza br. y c. ext. pasando por la susp. (Tsukahara 2)
extendido a ángulo (2 s.). o doblados) y a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). fac. horiz. mom. a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.).
(Pineda)
Change pictograme to straight arms
43. 44. 45. 46. Pineda pour la croix l’appui fac. horiz. (2 s.). 47. Établissement en force bras et corps tendus en 48.
Pineda through cross to support scale (2 s.). passant par la susp. fac. horiz. à à l’appui fac.
Pineda a través de cristo a plancha (2 s.). horiz. entre les anneaux (2 s.).
Pull with straight body and arms through mo-
(Pham) ment. front lever to swallow (2 s.).
Dominación a fuerza br. y cuerpo ext. pasando
por la susp. facial horizontal a hirondelle (2 s.).
(Bhavsar)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Établissement en force, bras fléchis à la sus- 51. Établissement en force, bras tendus à la susp. 52. Tour en arrière lent. corps et bras tendus à la 53. Azarian à la croix jambes levées en V (2 s.). 54.
pension dorsal horizontal (2 s.). dorsale horizontal (2 s.). croix ou croix angle (2 s.). Azarian to V Cross (2 s.).
Vertical pull up with bent arms to hanging scale Vertical pull up with straight arms to hanging Slow Roll bwd. slowly with str. arms stretched Azarian a cristo en V (2 s.).
rearways (2 s.). scale rearways (2 s.). body to cross or L-cross (2 s.).
Dominación a fuerza, b. flex. a la suspensión Dominación a fuerza, brazos extendidos a la Voltear atrás lentamente cuerpo y brazos ext a (Tay)
dorsal horizontal (2 s.). suspensión dorsal horizontal (2 s.). cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.).
(Azarian)
55. 56. De la croix ou croix angle, tourner en av. à la 57. Établissement en force, bras tendus à équerre 58. De ou par la susp. dors. horiz., établis. en force 59. Nakayama à la croix jambes levées en V (2 s.). 60. De la susp. dorsal horiz. (aucun maintien
suspension dorsal horizontal (2 s.). écarté (2 s.). bras tendus à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). Nakayama to V cross (2 s.). requis), monter corps tendu en passant par la
Fr. cross or L-cr., move fwd. to back lever (2 s.). Vertical pull up with straight arms to L-sit (2 s.). From or through hanging scale rearways, with Nakayama a cristo en V (2 s.). croix à la position hirondel inversée (2 s.).
De cristo o cristo en ángulo, voltear atrás a la Dominación a fuerza, b. ext. a ángulo (2 s.). straight arms pull to cross or L-cross (2 s.). Through hanging scale rearways (no hold re-
suspensión dorsal horizontal (2 s.). De o por la sus. dorsal horiz., dominación a (NG Kiu Chung) quired) pull with str. body through cross to inv.
fuerza b. ext. a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). swallow (2 s.).
Desde plancha dorsal (no se requiere parada)
(Nakayama)
subir cuerpo ext. a través de cristo a hirondelle
invertida (2 s.).
(Zahran)
61. 62. De l’appui renverse, s’abaisser horizontal à la 63. De l’appui ou la croix, s’abaisser lent. bras t. à la 64. Établissement en force, bras tendus à la croix 65. De la planche, s’abaisser horiz. lent. à la susp. 66. XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
suspension dorsal horizontal (2 s.). susp. et établis. en force, bras t. à la croix (2 s.). ou croix angle (2 s.). dorsal horiz. et s’élever à l’hirondelle (2 s.) ou de From hang vertical pull up, slowly with straight
From hdst., lower horiz. to back lever (2 s.). From sup. or cross, lower slowly with str. arms Vertical pull up with straight arms to cross or l’hirondelle à la planche ou planche à planche. arms through cross to inverted swallow (2 s.).
Del apoyo invertido bajar horizontal a la suspen- to hang, and pull with str. arms to cross (2 s.). L-cross (2 s.). From planche, lower horiz. and slowly to hang- Desde la susp. sbubir lentamente con brazos
sión dorsal horizontal (2 s.). Del apoyo o cristo, bajar lentam. b. ext. a la Dominación a fuerza, b. extendidos a cristo o ing scale rw. and press to swallow (2 s.) or from ext. a traves de cristo a cristo inv. (2 seg.)
susp. y dominación a fuerza b. ext a cristo (2 s.). cristo en ángulo (2 s.). swallow same to planche or planche to planche.
(Li Xiaoshuang) De plancha, bajar horizont. lent. a la susp. dors.
horiz. y subir a hirondelle (2 s.) o hirondelle a
plancha. o plancha a plancha.
(Van Gelder)
(Tulloch 2)
67. 68. De l’appui renverse, s’abaisser en passant par 69. 70. De l’hirondelle, s’élever à l’appui fac. horiz. (2 s.). 71. De Hirondelle, s’abaisser horiz. lent. á la susp. 72. De la susp. dors. horiz., s’élever à l’hirondelle (aussi
la croix renverse à la suspension renversée. From swallow, press to support scale (2 s.). dors. horiz. et s’élever à la l’hirondelle. (2 s.). à l’appui fac. horiz.) (2 s.).
From handstand, lower slowly with straight arms De hirondelle elevarse al apoyo fac. horiz. (2 s.). From swallow, lower slowly to hanging scale, From hanging scale rw. press to swallow (also
through inverted cross to inverted hang. press to swallow (2 s.). to Support Scale) (2 s.).
Del apoyo invertido, bajar pasando por cristo Desde Hirondelle, bajar horiz. lentamente a De la susp. dors. horiz., elev. a hirondelle (tam-
invertido a la suspensión invertida. plancha dorsal para subir a Hirondelle (2 s.). bién a plancha) (2 s.).
(Zanetti)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. 75. De l’équerre, s’élever corps fléchi et bras ten- 76. De la croix angle, s’élever à la croix renvs. (2 s.). 77. De la croix s’élever corps tendu à la croix renvs 78.
dus, à la croix renverse. (2 s.). From L-cross, press to inverted cross (2 s.). (2 s.).
From L-sit, press to inverted cross (2 s.). De cristo en ángulo, elevarse a cristo inv. (2 s.). From cross, press with straight body to inverted
De ángulo, elevarse cuerpo flex. y brazos ext. cross (2 s.).
a cristo invertido (2 s.). De cristo elevarse cuerpo ext. a cristo inv. (2 s.).
79. 80. 81. De la croix ou croix angle, établis. de force à 82. De l’appui facial horizontal, s’élever à la croix 83. De l’hirondelle, s’élever à la croix renvs. (2 s.). 84.
l’équerre (2 s.). renverse (2 s.). From swallow, press to inverted cross (2 s.).
From cross or L-cross, press to L-sit (2 s.). From support lever, press to inverted cross (2 s.). De Hirondelle, elevarse a cristo invertido (2 s.).
De cristo o cristo en ángulo, dominación a Del apoyo facial horizontal, elevarse a cristo
fuerza a ángulo (2 s.). invertido (2 s.).
85. 86. 87. 88. De la croix, s’élever direct à l’appui facial hori- 89. De la croix, s’élever à l’hirondelle (2 s.). 90.
zontal (2 s.). From cross, press to swallow (2 s.).
From cross, press to planche without first going De cristo, elevarse a Hirondelle (2 s.).
to support (2 s.).
De cristo, elevarse directamente al apoyo facial
horizontal (2 s.).
91. 92. 93. 94. De la croix renvs. s’abaisser à la susp. renvs. et 95. De la croix renvs. s’abaisser à la susp. renvs.et 96.
etablis. lent. en tourn. en arrière à la croix. (2 s.). etablis. lent. en tourn. en arr. à l’hirondelle. (2 s.).
From inverted cross lower slowly to inverted From inverted cross lower slowly to inverted
hang and felge bwd. slowly to cross (2 s.). hang and felge bwd. slowly to swallow (2 s.).
De cristo inv., bajar a la suspensión inv. y domi- De cristo invertido, bajar a la suspensión inv. y
nar lentamente volteando atrás a cristo (2 s.). dominar lent. volteando atrás a hirondelle (2 s.).
(Vorobiov)) (Jotchev)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. 99. 100. Tour en arrière lent. corps et bras tendus à 101. Tour en arrière lent. corps et bras tendus à 102. Tour en arrière. lent. corps et bras tendus à
l’appui facial horizontal (2 s.). l’appui facial horizontal (2 s.). l’appui facial horiz. entre les anneaux (2 s.).
Slow Roll bwd. slowly with str. arms and body Roll bwd. slowly with str. arms and body to free Slow Roll bwd. slowly with str. arms and body
to free sup. scale (2 s.). sup. scale (2 s.). to swallow (2 s.).
Volteo lento atrás lentamente cuerpo y brazos Voltear. atrás lentamente cuerpo y brazos ext Volteo lento atrás cuerpo y brazos ext. hirondelle (2
ext al apoyo facial horizontal (2 s.). al apoyo facial horizontal (2 s.). s.).
(Yan Mijayoung)
103. 104. 105. 106. Tour d’appui avant lentement, bras tendus, 107 Tour d’appui avant lentement, corps et bras tendus, 108. Azarian à la croix renverse (2 s.).
passer par la croix pour terminer à l’appui facial passer par la croix à la croix inversée (2 s.). Azarian to inverted Swallow (2 s.).
horizontal (2 sec.). Slow roll fwd. with straight body and arms Azarian a hirondelle invertida (2 s.).
Slow roll fwd. with straight body str. w. str. arms through cross to inverted cross (2 s.).
through cross and press to planche support Rodar lentamente ad. con cuerpo y brazos ext. (Tulloch)
scale without first going to support (2 s.). a través de cristo a cristo invertido (2 s.).
Rodar ad. lentam. cuerpo y br. ext. a través de
cristo a plancha sin ir previamente al ap. (2 s.). (Wynn)
(Ng Kiu Chung 2)
109. 110. 111. 112. Tour d’appui avant lentement, corps et bras ten- 113. Tour d’appui avant lentement, corps et bras 114. De la suspension dorsale établissement. en
dus, à la croix (2 sec.) ou à la croix en équerre tendus, passer par la croix pour terminer à force, bras tendus à la croix renverse. (2 s.).
(2 sec.), aussi de la suspension inversée. l’appui fac. horiz. entre les anneaux (2 s.). Through hang rearways press with straight arms
Slow roll fwd. with str. body and arms to Cross Slow roll forward with straight body and arms and straight body to inverted cross (2 s.).
or L-Cross (2 s.), also from inverted hang. through cross to swallow (2 sec). Desde plancha dorsal subir con brazos y cuerpo
Rodar lent. ad. cuerpo y br. ext. a cristo o cristo Rodar lent. ad. cuerpo y brazos ext. a traves ext. a cristo invertido (2 s.).
en ángulo (2 s.), también desde susp. inv. de cristo a hirondelle.
(Carmona)
(Pham 2)
(Davtyan)
115. 116. 117. 118. 119. De la susp. établis. en force, bras t. à l’hiron- 120. De la suspension établissement en force, bras
delle ou pour l’hirondelle à la planche (2 s.). tendus à la croix renverse. (2 s.).
From hang vertical pull up with straight arms From hang vertical pull up with straight arms to
to swallow or thr. swallow to sup. scale (2 s.). inv. cross (2 s.).
Desde las susp. dom. a fuerza, b. ext. a Desde las suspensión dominación a fuerza, b.
hirondelle o a traves de hirondelle a plancha ext. a cristo invertido (2 s.).
(2 s.)
(Balandin 2)
(Balandin 1)
(Balandin 3)
SEPARAR
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG III: Élans menant à un élément de maintien en force (2 s.) - Swing to Strength hold elements (2 sec.) - Impulso a elementos de mantenimiento a fuerza (2 seg.)
1. 2. Établissement avant à l’équerre (2 s.). 3. Établis. av. à l’équerre jambes levées vert (2 s.). 4. 5. 6.
Uprise fwd. to L-sit, (2 s.). Uprise fwd. to V-sit (2 s.).
Dominación adelante. a ángulo (2 s.). Dominación ad. a ángulo p. verticales (2 s.).
7. 8. Bascule à l’équerre (2 s.). 9. Bascule à l’équerre jambes lev. vertical (2 s.). 10. 11. 12.
Kip to L-sit (2 s.). Kip to V-sit (2 s.).
Kippe ángulo (2 s.). Kippe a ángulo p. verticales (2 s.).
13. 14. Élancer en suspension en arrière, renverse- 15. 16. Tour avant entre les anneaux direct. a croix ou 17. Tour avant entre les anneaux direct. à la croix 18.
ment avant à l’équerre (2 s.). croix angle (2 s.). équerre jambes vertical (2 s.).
Backward swing to salto fwd. p. to L-sit (2 s.). Honma to cross / L-cross (2 s.). Honma to V cross (2 s.).
Lanzarse en suspensión atrás dislocando ad. Salto ad. entre anillas a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). Salto adelante entre las anillas directo a cristo
a ángulo (2 s.). en V (2 s.).
(Tanaka)
(Honma)
19. 20. 21. 22. De l’appui, salto av. c. à la croix ou croix angle 23. 24.
(2 s.).
Bwd. swing, salto fwd p. to cross or L- cross (2 s.).
Del apoyo mortal c. a cristo o cristo en áng. (2 s.).
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. 27. Établissement. avant à la croix ou croix à 28. 29. 30.
l’équerre (2 s.).
Uprise fwd. to cross or L-cross (2 s.).
Dominación ad. a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.).
31. 32. 33. Établissement. en arrière à la croix ou croix 34. 35. 36.
angle (2 s.).
Uprise bwd. to cross or L-cross (2 s.).
Dominación atrás a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.).
37. 38. 39. Li Ning à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). 40.Li Ning ou Li Ning 2 à la croix jambes levées 41. 42.
Li Ning or Li Ning 2 to cross or L-cross (2 s.). en V (2 s.).
Li Ning a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). Li Ning or Li Ning 2 to V Cross (2 s.).
Li Ning o Li Ning 2 a cristo en V (2 s.).
(Tsukahara)
43. 44. 45. Établissement en av. en tournant en arrière à 46. Bascule à la croix équerre jambes l. vert. (2 s.). 47. Établissement en av. en tournant en arrière à 48. Etabliss. av. à Hirondelle inv. sans ph. d’appui (2 s.).
la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). Kip to V cross (2 s.). l’appui facial horizontal entre les anneaux (2 s.). Uprise forwad. to inverted swallow e (2 s.).
Felge upward to cross or L-cross (2 s.). Kippe cristo ángulo piernas verticales (2 s.). Felge upward to Swallow(2 s.). Domin. ad. a hirondelle inv. sin fase de apoyo (2 s.).
Dominación adelante volteando atrás a cristo Dominación adelante volteando atrás a hiron-
o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). (Molinari) delle (2 s.) (Rodrigues)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 51. Bascule à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). 52. Établissement arrière à la croix jambes levées 53. Établissement. en arrière à l’appui facial hori- 54.Bascule à hirondelle inversée. (2 s.).
Kip to cross, or L-cross (2 s.). en V (2 s.). zontal entre les anneaux. (2 s.). Kip to inverted swallow (2 s.).
Kippe cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). Back Uprise bwd. to V cross (2 s.). Uprise bwd. to sup. scale at ring height (2 s.). Kip a hirondelle inv. (2 s.).
Dominación atrás a cristo en V (2 s.). Dominación atrás al apoyo facial horizontal entre
las anillas (2 s.).
(Kato)
55. 56. 57. Bascule dorsale à la croix ou croix angle (2 s.). 58. 59. Bascule dorsale à l’appui facial horiz. entre les 60.
Back kip to cross or L-cross (2 s.). anneaux (2 s.).
Báscula dorsal a cristo o cristo en ángulo (2 s.). Back kip to swallow (2 s.).
Báscula dorsal a hirondelle (2 s.).
61. 62. 63. Établissement. en av. en tournant en arrière à 64. Établissement. en av. en tournant en arrière à 65. 66.
l’appui facial horizontal écarté (2 s.). l’appui facial horizontal. (2 s.).
Felge upward to support scale straddled (2 s.). Felge upward to support scale (2 s.).
Dominación adelante volteando atrás al apoyo Dominación adelante volteando atrás al apoyo
facial horizontal piernas abiertas (2 s.). facial horizontal. (2 s.).
67. 68. 69. Établissement. en arrière à l’appui facial hori- 70. Établissement. en arrière à l’appui facial hori- 71. 72.
zontal écarté (2 s.). zontal (2 s.).
Uprise bwd. to support scale straddled (2 s.). Uprise bwd. to support scale (2 s.).
Dominación atrás al apoyo facial horizontal Dominación atrás al apoyo facial horiz. (2 s.).
piernas abiertas (2 s.).
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. 75. Bascule dorsale à l’appui facial horiz. éc. (2 s.). 76. Bascule dorsale à l’appui facial horiz. (2 s.). 77. 78.
Back kip to support scale straddled (2 s.). Back kip to support scale (2 s.).
Báscula dorsal al apoyo fac. hor. p. ab. (2 s.). Báscula dorsal al apoyo fac. hor. (2 s.).
79. 80. 81. 82. Tour d’appui arrière tendu à l’appui facial horizon- 83. 84.
tal (2 s.).
Felge bwd. stretched to free support scale (2
s.).
Giro de apoyo atrás ext. al apoyo facial horizontal
(2 s.).
85. 86. 87. 88. Établissement en avant en tournant en arrière 89. 90.
bras tendu à la croix renversée (2 s.).
Felge upward with straight arms to invert. cross
(2 s.).
Dominación adelante volteando atrás brazos ext.
a cristo invertido (2 s.).
91. 92. 93. 94. Établissement. arrière à la croix renvs. (2 s.). 95. 96.
Uprise bwd. to inverted cross (2 s.).
Dominación atrás a cristo invertido (2 s.).
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. 99. 100. Bascule dorsale à la croix renversé. (2 s.). 101. 102.
Back kip to inverted cross (2 s.).
Báscula dorsal a cristo invertido (2 s.).
103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108.
109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114.
115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
1. Salto avant carpé ou tendu. 2. Salto avant carpé ou tendu avec ½ t. 3. Salto avant carpé ou tendu avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 4. Salto avant carpé ou tendu avec 2/1 t. 5. 6.
Salto fwd. piked or stretched, also with ½ t. Salto fwd. piked or stretched with ½ 1/1 t. Salto fwd. piked or stretched with 1/1 or 3/2 t. Salto fwd. piked or stretched with 2/1 t.
Mortal adelante en carpa o extendido. Mortal adelante en carpa o extendido con ½ g. Mortal ad. en carpa o extendido con 1/1 o. 3/2 g. Mortal adelante en carpa o extendida con 2/1 g.
7. 8. 9. Double salto av. groupé ou groupé avec ½ t. 10. Double salto av. groupé avec 3/2 t. (aussi 1/1 t.). 11. 12.
Double salto fwd. tucked or tucked with ½ t. Double salto fwd. tucked with 3/2 t (also 1/1 t.).
Doble mortal adelante agrupado o agrupado Doble mortal ad. agr. con 3/2 g. (tamb. 1/1 g.).
con ½ g. (Fischer)
13. 14. 15. 16. Double salto av. carpé ou carpé avec ½ t. 17. Double salto av. carpé avec 3/2 t. (aussi 1/1 t.). 18.
Double salto fwd. piked or piked with ½ t. Double salto fwd. piked with 3/2 t. (also 1/1 t.).
Doble mortal adelante en carpa con ½ g. Doble mortal ad. en carpa con 3/2 g. (tamb. 1/1 g.).
(Balabanov)
19. Établissement arrière et salto arrière groupé. 20. Établissement arr. et salto arrière ca. ou tendu. 21. Établissement arrière et salto arrière tendu avec 22. 23. 24.
Uprise bwd. and salto bwd t. Uprise bwd. and salto bwd p. or str. 1/1 t.
Dominación atrás y mortal atrás agrupado. Dominación atrás y mortal atrás en carpa o ext. Uprise bwd. and salto bwd str. with 1/1 t.
(Köste) Dominación at. y mortal at. en carpa o ext. con
1/1 g.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Salto arrière carpé ou tendu. 26. Salto arrière tendu avec ½ ou 1/1 t. 27. Salto arrière tendu avec 2/1 t. ou 3/2 t. 28. 29. Salto arrière tendu avec 3/1 t. 30.
Salto bwd. piked or stretched. Salto bwd. stretched with ½ or 1/1 t. Salto bwd. stretched with 2/1 t. or 3/2 t. Salto bwd. stretched with 3/1 t.
Mortal atrás en carpa o extendido. Mortal atrás extendido con ½ o 1/1 g. Mortal atrás extendido con 2/1 g. o 3/2 g. Mortal atrás extendido con 3/1 g.
31. 32. Double salto arrière groupé ou carpé. 33. Double salto arrière tendu. 34. 35. 36. Triple salto arrière groupé.
Double salto bwd. tucked or piked. Double salto bwd. stretched. Triple salto bwd. tucked.
Doble mortal atrás agrupado o en carpa. Doble mortal extendido. Triple mortal atrás agrupado.
G
37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. Triple salto arrière carpé.
Triple salto bwd. piked.
Triple mortal atrás en carpa.
(Whittemburg)
H
43. 44. 45. Double salto arrière groupé avec ½ ou 1/1 t. 46. Double salto arrière groupé avec 3/2 t. 47. Double salto arrière groupe avec 2/1 t. 48. Double salto arrière groupe avec 5/2 t.
Double salto bwd. t. with ½ or 1/1 t. Double salto bwd. t. with 3/2 t. Double salto bwd. t. with 2/1 t. Double salto bwd. t. with 5/2 t.
Doble mortal at. agr. con ½ o 1/1 g. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 3/2 g. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 2/1 g. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 5/2 g.
(Tuuha)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. Salto arrière tendu avec 1/1 t. et salto groupé. 52. Double salto arrière tendu avec ½ ou 1/1 t. 53. 54. Double salto arrière tendu avec 3/2 ou 2/1 t.
Salto bwd. str. with 1/1 t. and salto t. Double salto bwd. stretched with ½ or 1/1 t. Double salto bwd. stretched with 3/2 or 2/1 t.
Mortal atrás extendido con 1/1 g. y mortal atrás Doble mortal extendido con ½ o 1/1 g. Doble mortal extendido con 3/2 o 2/1 g.
agrupado.
55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60.
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66.
67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.
Section 13: Vault
Height: 135 cm measured from the floor
Article 13.1 Description of a Vault Exercise

The gymnast must perform one vault except in Qualification for Vault
Finals and in Vault Finals where he must show two vaults from dif-
ferent Vault Groups and with different 2nd flight phases (for higher
difficulty vaults). For example: different direction - fwd./bwd and/or
different position - tucked/piked (for simple saltos) or minimum ½ turn
difference (for twisting saltos and simple flights). Each vault begins
with a run and a takeoff from both feet (with or without a round off) to
the vault board with legs together and is executed with a brief support
phase on the table with two hands. The vault may contain single or
multiple turns around the two axes of the body. After the first vault,
the gymnast returns without delay to the starting position and, at the
signal of the D1 Judge, performs his second vault.
Article 13.2 Content and construction

1. The gymnast must begin vault from a still stand with legs together
at a maximum distance or 25 meters, measured from the front edge
of the table to the inner side of the block attached at the end of the
vault run up mat. The vault begins with the first step or hop of the
gymnast, but the evaluation begins the moment his feet contact
the vaulting board. The length of the approach must be marked
on or alongside the approach lane.
2. The vault ends with a landing behind the table in a standing posi-
tion with legs together facing either towards or away from the table
(frontways or rearways).
3. The gymnast must show only vaults that he can perform with
mastery. He is required to show the Identification Number of his
intended vault before he vaults.
4. The gymnast may take-off only forwards or backwards and with
legs together. The only element that may be performed before the
vaulting board is a round off. For such vaults, the use of the vault-
ing board safety “collar” is mandatory and must be provided by
the competition organizer. For round off entry vaults, the gymnast
may use one official handy-mat provided only by the organizer.
5. Vaults with saltos during the first flight phase and vaults with
straddled legs during the second flight phase are neither listed
nor permitted.
6. The gymnast must show the intended body position (tucked, piked,
or stretched) in a distinct and unmistakable manner. Indistinct body
positions are deducted by the E-Jury and may result in recognition
as a lower value vault by the D-Jury.
Code MAG 2021 100

7. Basis for the Evaluation by the E-Jury:
a) First flight phase, up to the support with two hands.
b) 2nd flight phase, including the pushing off from the table up
to the landing in a standing position. The gymnast must dem-
onstrate a distinct rise in the height of his body after push off
from the table.
c) Body position in the momentary support on the table.
d) Deductions with regard to the deviation from the extended axis
of the table.
e) Technical execution during the entire vault.
f) The landing.
8. Landing Rules:
a) The gymnast must land with both feet within an area marked
left and right of the extended centre line of the table as de-
scribed in the following draw.

These lines must be clearly marked on the landing mat. Step-
ping on the line, but not over the line, is permitted.
The mat containing the marked landing zone for alignment
must be securely fastened so that it cannot shift during com-
petition.
b) Twisting during vaults must be completed before landing.
Incomplete twists result in the appropriate deduction, and if
incomplete by 90° or more, will result in non-recognition by
the D-jury and in recognition as a vault with a lower Difficulty
Value.
9. In the 2nd flight phase, the gymnast must show a conspicuous rise
in height of his center of gravity at the moment of hand push-off.
10. All Vaults Salto vaults tucked or piked must display a distinct
opening phase in preparation for landing. A landing that is not
prepared is a sign of an error in technique and will usually result
in a technical execution deduction as well as a landing deduction.
11. For a full list of errors and deductions governing Exercise Pre-
sentation see, Section 9 and the summary of deductions in Articles
9.4 and 13.3.

1. The gymnast must show one vault in Qualification, Team Final
and the All-Around Final. In the Qualification for Vault Final and in
Vault Finals he must show two vaults, which must be from different
Vault Groups (for all vaults) and which may not have the same or
similar 2nd flight phases (for the higher difficulty vaults).
Group I Single salto vaults with complex twists.
Group II Handspring salto vaults with or without simple
Code MAG 2021 101

twists, and all double salto fwd.
Group III Tsukahara vaults with or without simple twists,
and all double salto bwd.
Group IV Round off entry vaults.
Group V Simple vaults.
2. Each vault is listed, numbered, and given a value in the Difficulty
Tables within its Group. The following general principles apply:
a) Cuervo vaults have the same value as equivalent Handspring
Salto vaults with twists.
b) Kasamatsu vaults have the same value as the equivalent
Tsukahara vaults.
c) Yurchenko vaults have the same value as the analogous
Tsukahara or Kasamatsu vaults.
d) Unless otherwise indicated, round off entry vaults with ½ turn
to the table have a value of 0.20 more than the analogous
forward approach vaults.
e) Unless otherwise indicated, round off entry vaults with ¾ or 1/1
turn to the table have a value of 0.60 more than the analogous
Tsukahara vaults.
3. Each vault is given a unique Difficulty Value based on its complexity.
4. Prior to the execution of each vault, the appropriate vault number,
as assigned in the Code of Points must be displayed for the D-jury.
This function is performed by the gymnast, or an assistant, with
the aid of a flashboard and is not penalized in the case of error.
Example: #319 - The #3 designates the vault group; the
#19 designates the vault number within that vault group.
5. The gymnast must show the intended body position (tucked, piked,
or stretched) in a distinct and unmistakable manner. Non-distinct
body positions may result in non-recognition by the D-Jury or
recognition as a vault with a lower Difficulty Value. (see the body
position definitions in Appendix A Section 3). The gymnast must
display the vault number for the vault that he can do, not the one
he hopes to do. This warning applies especially for the recognition
of stretched and piked positions.
6. The placement mat may be used for round off entry vaults only,
and is optional.
7. The vault is invalid (0.00 point from the D-Jury and the E-Jury)) when:
a) The vault is executed without a support phase, i.e., neither
hand or only one hand touches the table.
b) Failure to use the safety collar for round off entry vaults.
c) The vault is so poorly executed that the intended vault cannot
be recognized, or the gymnast pushes from the table with his/
her feet.
d) Spotting assistance during the vault.
e) The gymnast does not land with his feet first. This means that
at least one foot must contact the landing mat before any other
part of the body.
f) The gymnast lands intentionally in a side stand.
g) The gymnast performs a prohibited vault (straddled legs in the
second flight phase,, salto in the first flight phase, prohibited
pre-element before the vaulting board, etc.).
h) The first vault is repeated for the second vault in Qualification
for Vault Final or in Vault Final.
Code MAG 2021 102

A video review by D- panel and Apparatus supervisor will au-
tomatically occur for every vault receiving an Invalid “0 “Score.
All E-Jury judges enter their deductions after every vault per-
formed. The D jury will notify them in the case of a “0” vault and
advise them of the method to present a “0” E-score.
8. In Qualification, Team Final, and All-Around Final:
• One vault must be performed.
• In Qualification, the 1st vault score counts toward the Team and/
or All-Around Total.
For Qualification and in the Apparatus Final, each gymnast must
perform two different vaults which must be from different Vault Groups
(for pages 1 & 2 of Vault Value Table) and which may not have the same
or similar 2nd flight phases (for page 2 of the Vault Value Table only).
In Qualification and in the Apparatus Final, the average score
of the 2 vaults will determine the final score for the gymnast.
9. Additional run approaches are permitted as follows, with deduction
of 1.00 for empty run (if gymnasts has not touched the springboard
or apparatus).
- When 1 vault is required, a second run approach is permitted
with deduction. Third approach not permitted.
- When 2 vaults are required, a third run approach is permitted
with deduction. Fourth approach not permitted.
Code MAG 2021 103

Article 13.3 Table of Specific Errors and Deductions for Vault
D jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Landing or touching with one foot
or one hand outside the landing 0.1 from the final score
area.
Touching with feet, hands, foot and
hand or with any other part of the 0.3 from the final score
body outside of the landing area.
Landing directly outside the landing
0.3 from the final score
area.
Exceeding 25 meter run for Vault. 0,50 from the Final Score by the
D1 judge
Illegal or invalid vaults. Score of 0,00 for the vault
Failure to use vault board safety
collar for round off entry vaults. Score of 0,00 for the vault
Repeating 1st vault in Qualification

Score of 0,00 for the vault
or in Vault-Final.
Repeating 1 vault group in Qualifi-
st
cation or in Vault-Final. 2,0 point deduction for the 2nd vault
Same or similar 2nd flight phase for

the two vaults in Qualification or in 2,0 point deduction for the 2nd vault
Vault-Final (Table page 2).
Additional run approach. 1,00 point deduction
E Jury deductions
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Execution errors in 1st flight.
+ + +
Technical errors in 1st flight.

+ + +
Passing the handstand position not

+ + +
through the vertical.
Execution errors in 2nd flight.
+ + +
Technical errors in 2nd flight.

+ + +
Insufficient height, no conspicuous

+ + +
rise of the body.
Lack of extension in preparation
+ +
for landing.
Code MAG 2021 104

2017 - 2020
TABLEAU DE VALEUR POUR LE SAUT FIG GAM - FIG MAG VAULT VALUE TABLE - TABLA DE VALOR DE SALTOS FIG GAM
EG 1 EG 2 EG 3 EG 4 EG 5
Renversements avant Sauts avec ¼ ou ½ t. dans le phase d’envol Sauts à partir de la rondade Sauts à partir de la rondade avec ½ t. dans la 1er phase d’envol Entrée Scherbo dans la 1er phase d’envol
Handspring ¼ or ½ tw in 1st flight Round off entry Round off w/ ½ tw in 1st flight Scherbo entry in 1st flight
Palomas ¼ o ½ g. en la 1ª fase de vuelo Entradas de Rondada Rondadas con ½ g. en la 1ª fase de vuelo Entradas Scherbo en la 1ª fase
Renversement avant. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. Rondade renversement arrière Rondade ½ t. et renversement avant. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t et renversement arrière
101 Handspring. 1,6 220 Handspring sideways ¼ tw. 1,6 335 Round off back handspring 1,6 450 Round off ½ tw handspring 1,8 560 Scherbo entry to back handspring 2,2
Paloma. Rondada con ¼ g. Rondada inversión atrás Rondada ½ g paloma Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás
Renversement avant avec ½ t. Renversement latéral avec 3/4 t. Rondade renversement arrière avec ½ t. Rondade ½ t. et renversement avant avec ½ t. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et renv. arr. avec ½ t.
102 Handspring ½ tw. 1,8 221 Handspring sideways 3/4 tw 1,8 336 Round off back handspring ½ tw 1,8 451 Round off ½ tw handspring ½ tw 2,0 561 Scherbo entry to back handspring ½ tw 2,4
Paloma con ½ g. Rondada con 3/4 g. Rondada inversión atrás con ½ g. Rondada ½ g. paloma con ½ g. Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás con ½ g.
Renversement avant avec 1/1 t. Renversement latéral avec 5/4 t. Rondade renversement arrière avec 1/1 t. Rondade ½ t. et renversement avant avec 1/1 t. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et renv. arr. avec 1/1 t.
103 Handspring 1/1 tw. 2,0 222 Handspring sideways 5/4 tw 2,0 337 Round off back handspring 1/1 tw 2,0 452 Round off ½ tw handspring 1/1 tw 2,2 562 Scherbo entry to back handspring 1/1 tw 2,6
Paloma con 1/1 g. Rondada con 5/4 g. Rondada inversión atrás con 1/1 g. Rondada ½ g. paloma con 1/1 g. Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás con 1/1 g.
Renversement avant avec 3/2 t. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. et salto avant groupé. Rondade renv. arrière et salto arrière gr. (Yurchenko) Rondade ½ t. et renversement avant salto avant groupé. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et salto arrière groupé.
104 Handspring 3/2 tw. 2,2 223 Handspring sideways ¼ tw salto forward tucked 2,4 338 Round off back handspring salto bwd tucked (Yurchenko) 2,2 453 Round off ½ tw handspring salto forward tucked. 2,6 563 Scherbo entry to salto backward tucked 2,8
Paloma con 3/2 g. Rondada con ¼ g. mortal adelante agrupado Rondada inversión mortal atrás agrupado (Yurchenko) Rondada ½ g. paloma mortal agrupado. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado.
Renversement avant avec 2/1 t. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. et salto avant carpé. Yurchenko avec ½ t. Rondade ½ t., renv. avant salto avant groupé avec ½ t. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et salto arrière carpé.
105 Handspring 2/1 tw. 2,4 224 Handspring sideways ¼ tw salto forward piked 2,8 339 Yurchenko tucked ½ tw 2,4 454 Round off ½ tw handspring salto forward tucked ½ tw 3,0 564 Scherbo entry & to salto backward piked 3,0
Paloma con 2/1 g. Rondada con ¼ g. mortal adelante en carpa Yurchenko con ½ g. Rondada ½ g. paloma mortal agrupado con ½ g. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás en carpa.
Renversement avant avec 5/2 t. (Tsygankov) Renv. lat. avec ¼ t. et salto arr. groupé (Tsukahara) Yurchenko avec 1/1 t. Rondade ½ t. et renversement avant salto avant carpé. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et salto arr. gr. avec ½ t.
106 Handspring 5/2 tw. (Tsygankov) 2,6 225 Handspring sideways ¼ tw salto bwd tucked (Tsukahara) 2,2 340 Yurchenko tucked 1/1 tw 2,8 455 Round off ½ tw handspring salto forward piked. 3,0 565 Scherbo entry & to salto backward tucked ½ tw 3,0
Paloma con 5/2 g. (Tsygankov) Rondada con ¼ g. mortal atrás agrupado (Tsukahara) Yurchenko con 1/1 g. Rondada ½ g. paloma mortal en carpa. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado con ½ g.
Renversement avant et salto avant groupé. Tsukahara carpe Yurchenko avec 3/2 t. Rondade ½ t. et renv. av. salto av. carpé ½ t. (Nemov) Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et salto arr. gr. avec 1/1 t.
107 Handspring salto forward tucked. 2,4 226 Tsukahara piked 2,4 341 Yurchenko tucked 3/2 tw 3,2 456 Round off ½ tw handspring salto fwd piked ½ tw (Nemov) 3,4 566 Scherbo entry & salto backward tucked 1/1 tw 3,4
Paloma mortal agrupado Tsukahara en carpa Yurchenko con 3/2 g. Rondada ½ g. paloma mortal en carpa con ½ g. (Nemov) Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado con 1/1 g.
Renv. av. et salto av. groupé avec ½ t. (Cuervo groupé) Tsukahara groupé avec ½ t. Yurchenko avec 2/1 t. Rondade, saut arr. avec 1/1 t et salto arr. gr. avec 3/2 t.
108 Handspring salto forward tucked ½ tw. (Cuervo tucked) 2,8 227 Tsukahara tucked ½ tw 2,4 342 Yurchenko tucked 2/1 tw 3,6 567 Scherbo entry & to salto backward tucked 3/2 tw 3,8
Paloma mortal agr. con ½ g. (Cuervo agrupado) Tsukahara agrupado con ½ g. Yurchenko con 2/1 g. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado con 3/2 g.
Renv. lat. avec ¼ t. et salto av. gr. avec ½ t. (Kasamatsu)
ou Tsukahara groupé avec 1/1 t.
Renv. av. et salto av. gr. avec 1/1 t. (Cuervo gr. avec ½ t.) Yurchenko carpé
Handspring sideways ¼ tw. and salto fwd. tucked ½ tw.
109 Handspring salto fwd tucked 1/1 tw. (Cuervo tucked ½ tw) 3,2 228 2,8 343 Yurchenko piked 2,4
(Kasamatsu) or Tsukahara tucked 1/1 tw.
Paloma mortal agr. con 1/1 g. (Cuervo agr. con ½ g.) Yurchenko en carpa
Rondada con ¼ g. mortal ad agr. con ½ g. (Kasamatsu) o
Tsukahara agrupado con 1/1 g
Renv. av. et salto av. gr. avec 3/2 t. (Kroll) ou Cuervo gr.
Kasamatsu gr. avec ½ ou Tsukahara groupé avec 3/2 t.
avec 1/1 t.)
110 3,6 229 Kasamatsu tucked ½ tw or Tsukahara tucked 3/2 tw 3,2
Handspring salto fwd t. 3/2 tw (Kroll) or Cuervo t 1/1 tw.
Kasamatsu agr. con ½ g. o Tsukahara agr. con 3/2 g.
Paloma mortal agr. con 3/2 g. (Kroll) o Cuervo agr. 1/1 g.
Renv. av. et salto av. gr. avec 2/1 t. (Canbas) ou Cuervo Tsukahara gr. avec 2/1 t. (Barbieri) or Kasamatsu 1/1 gr.
gr. avec 3/2 t.) 230 Tsukahara t. 2/1 tw (Barbieri) or Kasamatsu 1/1 tucked 3,6
111 4,0
Handspring salto fwd t. 2/1 tw (Canbas) (Cuervo t 3/2 tw) Tsukahara agr. con 2/1 g. (Barbieri) o Kasamatsu 1/1 agr.
Paloma mortal agr. con 2/1 g. (Canbas) (Cuervo 3/2 g.)
Renversement avant et salto avant carpé.
112 Handspring salto forward piked 2,8
Paloma mortal en carpa.
Renv. avant et salto avant carpé avec ½ t. (Cuervo carpé)
113 Handspring salto forward piked ½ tw (Cuervo piked) 3,2
Paloma mortal en carpa con ½ g. (Cuervo carpa.)
Renv. av. et salto av. carpé avec 1/1 t. (Cuervo carpé
avec ½ t.)
114 3,6
Handspring salto fwd. piked 1/1 tw. (Cuervo piked ½ tw)
Paloma mortal en carpa con 1/1 g. (Cuervo carpa ½ g.)
Renv. av. et salto av. carpé avec 3/2 t. (Cuervo carpé
avec 1/1 t.)
115 4,0
Handspring salto fwd. piked 3/2 tw. (Cuervo piked 1/1 tw.)
Paloma mortal en carpa con 3/2 g. (Cuervo carpa 1/1 g.)
Renversement av. 1/1 t et salto av. groupé (Behrend)
116 Handspring w 1/1 tw to salto forward tucked (Behrend) 4,0
Paloma con 1/1 g. mortal ad. agrupado (Behrend)
Renversement avant 1/1 t et salto avant carpé (Rehm)

117 Handspring w 1/1 tw to salto forward piked (Rehm) 4,4
Paloma con 1/1 g. mortal ad. en carpa (Rehm)
Renv. avant 1/1 t et salto avant carpé avec ½ t. (Arican)

118 Handspring w. 1/1 tw. to salto fwd. piked ½ tw. (Arican) 4,8
Paloma con 1/1 g. mortal ad. en carpa con ½ g. (Arican)
Code MAG 2021 105

2017 - 2020
TABLEAU DE VALEUR POUR LE SAUT FIG GAM - FIG MAG VAULT VALUE TABLE - TABLA DE VALOR DE SALTOS FIG GAM
EG 1 EG 2 EG 3 EG 4 EG 5
Renversements avant Sauts avec ¼ ou ½ t. dans le phase d’envol Sauts à partir de la rondade Sauts à partir de la rondade avec ½ t. dans la 1er phase d’envol Entrée Scherbo dans la 1er phase d’envol
Handspring ¼ or ½ tw in 1st flight Round off entry Round off w/ ½ tw in 1st flight Scherbo entry in 1st flight
Palomas ¼ o ½ g. en la 1ª fase de vuelo Entradas de Rondada Rondadas con ½ g. en la 1ª fase de vuelo Entradas Scherbo en la 1ª fase
Tsukahara tendu. Yurchenko tendu. Rond. salto arr. avec 1/1 t et renv. arr. salto arr. carpé. (Scherbo)
270 Tsukahara str. 3,2 370 Yurchenko str. 3,2 570 Scherbo entry to salto bwd. stretched (Scherbo) 3,8
Tsukahara extendido. 1 Yurchenko extendido. 1 Entrada de Scherbo mortal at. ext. (Scherbo) 1
Renversement avant et salto avant tendu. Renv. latéral avec ¼ g. salto av. t. ou Tsukahara t. avec ½ t. Yurchenko tendu avec ½ t Rondade avec ½ t. renversement arr. tendu. Scherbo avec ½ t.
171 Handspring salto forward stretched. 3,6 271 Hdast sideways ¼ tw salto fwd. str or Tsukahara str. ½ tw. 3,6 371 Yurchenko str. ½ tw. 3,6 471 Round off ½ tw handspring salto fwd str. 3,8 571 Scherbo ½ tw. 4,2
Paloma Mortal adelante extendido. 2 3 Rond. ¼ g. mortal ad. ext. o Tsukahara ext ½ g. 1 3 Yurchenko ext. con ½ g. 1 Rondada con ½ g. mortal atrás ext. 2 3 Scherbo con ½ g. 1
Renv. av. et salto av. t. avec ½ t. (Cuervo t.) Kasamatsu tendu ou Tsukahara tendu avec 1/1 t. Yurchenko tendu avec 1/1 t. Rondade avec ½ t. renv. av. tendu avec ½ t. (Hutcheon) Scherbo avec 1/1 t.
172 Handspring salto fwd. str. ½ tw. (Cuervo str.) 4,0 272 Kasamatsu str. or Tsukahara str. 1/1 tw. 4,0 372 Yurchenko str. 1/1 tw. 4,0 472 Round off ½ tw. handspring salto fwd. str. ½ tw. (Hutcheon) 4,2 572 Scherbo 1/1 tw. 4,6
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con ½ g. (Cuervo ext.) 2 3 Kasamatsu ext. o Tsukahara ext. con 1/1 g 1 3 Yurchenko ext. con 1/1 g. 1 Rond. ½ g. mortal ad. ext con ½ g. (Hutcheon) 2 3 Scherbo con 1/1 g. 1
Renv. et salto av. t. avec 1/1 t. (Cuervo t. ½ t.) Kasamatsu tendu avec ½ t. ou Tsukahara tendu 3/2 t. Yurchenko tendu avec 3/2 t. Rondade avec ½ t. renv. av. tendu. avec 1/1 t. Scherbo avec 3/2 t.
173 Handspring salto fwd. str. 1/1 tw. (Cuervo str ½ tw.) 4,4 273 Kasamatsu str. ½ tw or Tsukahara str. 3/2 tw 4,4 373 Yurchenko str. 3/2 tw. 4,4 473 Round off ½ tw. handspring salto fwd. str. 1/1 tw. 4,6 573 Scherbo 3/2 tw. 5,0
Paloma mortal ad. ext con 1/1 g. (Cuervo ext. ½ g.) 2 3 Kasamatsu ext. ½ g. o Tsukahara ext. 3/2 g 1 3 Yurchenko ext con 3/2 g. 1 Rondada con ½ g. mortal ad. ext. con 1/1 g. 2 3 Scherbo con 3/2 g. 1
Renv. et salto av. t. avec 3/2 t. (Cuervo t. 1/1 t.) (Lou Yun) Kasamatsu tendu 1/1 t ou Tsukahara tendu 2/1 t. (Akopian) Yurchenko tendu avec 2/1 t. Rondade avec ½ t. renv. av. ext. avec salto 3/2 t. Scherbo avec 2/1 t. (Shirai 3)
174 Hdst. salto fwd. str. 3/2 tw. (Cuervo str 1/1 tw.) (Lou Yun) 4,8 274 Kasamatsu str. 1/1 tw. or Tsukahara str. 2/1 tw. (Akopian) 4,8 374 Yurchenko str. 2/1 tw. 4,8 474 Round off ½ tw. handspring salto fwd. str. 3/2 tw. 5,0 574 Scherbo 2/1 tw. (Shirai 3) 5,4
Paloma mortal ad. ext. 3/2 g. (cuervo ext. 1/1 g.) (Lou Yun) 2 3 Kasam. ext. 1/1 g. o Tsukahara ext. 2/1 g. (Akopian) 1 3 Yurchenko ext. con 2/1 g. 1 Rondada con ½ g. mortal ad. ext. con 3/2 g. 2 3 Scherbo con 2/1 g. (Shirai 3) 1
Renv. et salto av. t. avec 2/1 t. (Cuervo t. 3/2 t) Kasamatsu tendu avec 3/2 t. (Driggs) Yurchenko tendu avec 5/2 t. (Shewfelt) Rondade avec ½ t. renv. av. tendu avec 2/1 t. Scherbo avec 5/2 t.
175 Handspring salto fwd. str. 2/1 tw. (Cuervo str 3/2 tw). 5,2 275 Kasamatsu str. 3/2 tw. (Driggs) 5,2 375 Yurchenko str. 5/2 tw. (Shewfelt) 5,2 475 Round off ½ tw. handspring salto fwd. str, 2/1 tw. 5,4 575 Scherbo 5/2 tw. 5,8
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 2/1 g. (Cuervo ext. 3/2 g) 2 3 Kasamatsu ext. con 3/2 g. (Driggs) 1 3 Yurchenko ext. con 5/2 g. (Shewfelt) 1 Rondada con ½ g. paloma mortal ad. ext. 2/1 g. 2 3 Scherbo con 5/2 g. 1
Renv. et salto av. t. avec 5/2 t. (Cuervo t. 1/1 t.) Kasamatsu tendu avec 2/1 t. (Lopez) Yurchenko tendu avec 3/1 t. (Shirai - Kim Hee Hoon) Rondade avec ½ t. renv. av. tendu avec 5/2 t. (Li Xiao Peng)
176 Handspring salto fwd. str. 5/2 tw. (Yeo 2) 5,6 276 Kasamatsu str. 2/1 tw. (Lopez) 5,6 376 Yurchenko str. 3/1 tw. (Shirai - Kim Hee Hoon) 5,6 476 Round off ½ tw. hdst. salto fwd. str 5/2 tw (Li Xiao Peng) 5,8
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 5/2 g. (Cuervo ext. 1/1 g.) 2 3 Kasamatsu ext. con 2/1 g. (López) 1 3 Yurchenko ext. con 3/1 g. (Shirai - Kim Hee Hoon) 1 Rond. ½ g. mortal ad. ext. 5/2 g. (Li Xiao Peng) 2 3
Renv. et salto av. tendu avec 3/1 t. (Yang Hak Seon) Kasamatsu tendu 5/2 t.
177 Handspring salto fwd. str. 3/1 tw. (Yang Hak Seon) 6,0 277 Kasamatsu str. 5/2 tw. 6,0
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 3/1 g. (Yang Hak Seon) 3 Kasamatsu ext. 5/2 g. 3
Renv. av. et double salto av. gr. (Roche) Rondade avec ½ t. renv. et double salto av. gr.
178 Handspring double salto fwd. tucked (Roche) 5,2 478 Round off ½ tw. hdst. double salto fwd. tucked 5,4
Paloma doble mortal adelante agr. (Roche) 1 Rondada con ½ g. paloma doble mortal ad. agr. 1
Roche ½ t. (Dragulescu)
179 Roche ½ tw. (Dragulescu) 5,6
Roche con ½ g. (Dragulescu)
Tsukahara avec salto av. groupe (Yeo) Yurchenko et salto arr. groupé (Melissanidis)
285 Tsukahara with salto bwd tucked (Yeo) 5,2 385 Yurchenko and salto bwd. tucked (Melissanidis) 5,2
Tsukahara mortal ad. agrupado (Yeo) 1 Yurchenko mortal at. agrupado (Melissanidis) 1
Tsukahara avec salto av. carpé (Lu Yu Fu) Yurchenko et salto arr. carpé (Melissanidis carpé)
286 Tsukahara with salto bwd. piked (Lu Yu Fu) 5,6 386 Yurchenko and salto bwd. piked (Melissanidis piked) 5,6
Tsukahara mortal ad. en carpa (Lu Yu Fu) 1 Yurchenko mortal at. carpa (Melissanidis carpa) 1 CLÉ
Tsukahara double salto gr. avec 1/1 t. (Ri Se Gwang) KEY
287 Double Tsukahara tucked 1/1 tw. (Ri Se Gwang) 6,0 CLAVE
Doble Tsukahara agr. con 1/1 g. (Ri Se Gwang)
2ème phase d’envol identique
Renv. salto av. avec ½ t. et salto arr. (Zimmerman) Same 2nd Flight Phase 1
190 Handspring salto fwd. ½ tw to salto bwd. (Zimmerman) 5,6 2ª fase de vuelo igual
Paloma mortal ad. ½ g. mortal atrás (Zimmerman)
2ème phase d’envol identique
Renversement av. double salto av. carpé (Blanik) Same 2nd Flight Phase 2
191 Handspring double salto fwd. piked (Blanik) 5,6 Cette page montre aussi les sauts présentant une deuxième phase d’envol identique ou similaire répertoriés dans le tableau 2ª fase de vuelo igual
Paloma doble mortal ad. en carpa (Blanik) lorsque leurs numéros se terminent par les deux mêmes chiffres, et qu’un chiffre clé situé dans la case est également identique.
Ces sauts avec une déduction potentielle de deux points pour les qualifications ou la finale, sont présentés sur la même ligne.. 2ème phase d’envol similaire
Renv. double salto av. carpé avec ½ t.(RI Se Gwang 2) Similar 2nd Flight Phase 3
192 Hdst. double salto fwd. piked ½ tw. (RI Se Gwang 2) 6,0 This page also shows vaults with same or similar 2nd flight phase, denoted with the same last two digits in the vault number and 2ª fase de vuelo similar
Paloma doble mortal carpa ½ g.(RI Se Gwang 2) Key number in the table boxes. The vaults with a potential deduction of -2.0 for qualification to and in the apparatus final are
located in the same row of this table. Le gymnaste ne peut pas exécuter deux sauts avec identiques
ou avec la même deuxième phase d’envol
Esta página muestra también los saltos con la 2ª fase de vuelo igual o similar, anotados en el cuadro con los dos últimos dígitos Gymnasts may not do vaults with the same or similar 2nd
iguales del número de salto y la misma clave. Los saltos con una deducción potencial de - 2,0 para la clasificación y la final de flight phase.
aparatos, se colocan en la misma fila de la tabla El gimnasta no puede realizar saltos con la 2ª fase de vuelo
igual o similar
Code MAG 2021 106

EG I: Forward Handspring style vaults - Single salto vaults with complex twists - Saltos con giros complejos
101. Renvs. av. et salto av. gr. avec 1/1 t. (Cuervo 102. Renvs. av. et salto av. gr. avec 3/2 t. (Cuervo 103. Renvs. av. et salto av. gr. avec 2/1 t. (ou Cuervo 104. 105. 106.
gr. a. ½ t.). gr. a. 1/1 t.). gr. a. 3/2 t.).
Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. t. w. 1/1 t. (Cuervo t. Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. t. w. 3/2 t. (Cuervo Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. t. w. 2/1 t. (or Cuervo
w. ½ t.). t. w. 1/1 t.). t. w. 3/2 t.).
Paloma mortal ad. agr. con 1/1 g. (Cuervo agr. Paloma mortal ad. agr. con 3/2 g. (Cuervo agr. Paloma mortal ad. agr. con. 2/1 g. (o. Cuervo
con. ½ g.). con 1/1 g.). agr. con 3/2 g.).
(Kroll) (Canbas)
3.2 3.6 4.0
107. 108. 109. 110. 111. Renvs. av. et salto av. ca. avec 1/1 t. (Cuervo 112. Renvs. av. et salto av. ca. avec 3/2 t. (Cuervo
carpé a. ½ t.). carpé a. 1/1 t.).
Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. p. w. 1/1 t. (Cuervo Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. p. w. 3/2 t. (Cuervo
p. w. ½ t.). p. w. 1/1 t.).
Paloma mortal en carpa con 1/1 g. (Cuervo en Paloma mortal en carpa con 3/2 g. (Cuervo
carpa con ½ g.). en carpa con 1/1 g.).
3.6 4.0
113. 114. 115. 116. Renversement avant 1/1 t. et salto av. gr. 117. Renversement av. a. 1/1 t. et salto av. carpé. 118. Renvs. avant avec 1/1 t. et salto av. carpé ½ t.
Hdspr. fwd. w. 1/1 t. a. salto fwd. t. Hdspr. fwd. w. 1/1 t. and salto fwd. p. Hdspr. fwd. 1/1 t. and Salto fwd piked ½ t.
Paloma con 1/1 g. agrupado mortal ad. agr. Paloma con 1/1 g. agrupado mortal ad. carp. Paloma con 1/1 g. y mortal ad. en carpa con
½ g.
(Behrend) (Rehm) (Arican)
4.0 4.4 4.8

177. Renvs. av. et salto av. tendu av. 3/1 t. 120. 121. Renversement av. et salto av. tendu avec 1/1 122. Renversement av. et salto av. tendu avec 3/2 t. 123. Renversement av. et salto av. tendu avec 2/1 124. Renversement av. et salto av. tendu av. 5/2 t.
Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. 3/1 t. t. (Cuervo tendu ½ t.). (Cuervo tendu 1/1 t.). t. (Cuervo tendu 3/2 t.). Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. 5/2 t.
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 3/1 g. Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. 1/1 t. (Cuervo Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. 3/2 t. (Cuervo Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. 2/1 t. (Cuervo Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 5/2 g.
str. ½ t.). str. w. 1/1 t.). str. 3/2 t.).
(Yang Hak Seon) Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 1/1 g. (Cuervo ext. Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 3/2 g. (Cuervo ext. Paloma mortal ad. ext. con 2/1 g. (Cuervo ex. (Yeo 2)
con ½ g.). con 1/1 g.). con 3/2 g.).
(Lou Yun)
4.4
6.0 4.8 5,2 123. 5.6
Code MAG 2021 107
EG I: Sauts avec ¼ ou ½ tour dans la 1ère phase d’envol - Single salto vaults with complex twists - Saltos con giros complejos
125. 126. 127.
131. Tsukahara gr. avec 3/2 t. ou Kasamatsu gr. 132. Tsukahara groupé avec 2/1 t. 133. 134. 135. 136.
avec ½ t. Tsukahara t. with 2/1 t.
Tsukahara t. w. 3/2 t.or Kasamatsu t. ½ t Tsukahara agrupado con 2/1 g.
Tsukahara agrupado con. 3/2 g. o Kasamatsu
agrupado con ½ g.
3.2 3.6 (Barbieri)
137. 138. 139. 140. 141. Kasamatsu tendu avec ½ t. ou Tsukahara 142. Kasamatsu t. avec 1/1 t. ou Tsukahara t. avec 2/1 t.
tendu avec 3/2 t. Kasamatsu str. w. 1/1 t. or Tsukahara str. w. 2/1 t.
Kasamatsu str. with ½ t. or Tsukahara str. w. 3/2 t. Kasamatsu ext. con 1/1 g. o. Tsukahara ext. con 2/1 g.
Kasamatsu extendido con ½ g. o. Tsukahara (Akopian)
extendido con 3/2 g.
4.4 4.8
143. Kasamatsu tendu avec 3/2 t. 144. 145. Kasamatsu tendu avec 2/1 t. 146. Kasamatsu tendu avec 5/2 t. ou Tsukahara 147. 148.
Kasamatsu str. with 3/2 t. Kasamatsu str. with 2/1 t. tendu avec 7/2 t.
Kasamatsu extendido con 3/2 g. Kasamatsu extendido con 2/1 g. Kasamatsu str. with 5/2 t. or Tsukahara st. with
(Driggs) 7/2 t.
(López)
Kasamatsu extendido con 5/2 g. o Tsukahara
ext. con t/2 g.
5.2 5.6 6.0 (Yonekura)
Code MAG 2021 108

EG II: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX- Handspring salto vaults with or without simple twists, and all double salto fwd.- Palomas con o sin giros y dobles mortales ad.
201. Renversement av. et salto av. gr. 202. Renvs. av. et salto av. gr. avec ½ t. (ou Cuervo gr.). 203. 204. 205. 206.
Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. t. Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. t. w. ½ t. (or Cuervo t.).
Paloma mortal ad. agr. Paloma mortal ad. agr. con ½ (o. Cuervo agr.).
2.4 2.8
207. 208. 209. 210. 211. Renversement av. et salto av. ca. 212. Renvs. av. et salto av. ca. avec ½ t. (Cuervo ca.).
Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. piked. Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. p. w. ½ t. (Cuervo p.).
Paloma mortal en carpa. Paloma mortal en carpa con ½ g. (Cuervo carp.).
2.8 3.2
213. 214. 215. 216. 217. 218.
219 220. 221. Renversement avant et salto av. tendu. 222. Renversement av. et salto avant tendu avec ½ 223. 224.
Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. str. t. (Cuervo tendu).
Paloma mortal adelante extendido. Hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. str. w. ½ t. (Cuervo
str.).
Paloma mortal ad. ext. con ½ g. (Cuervo ext.).
3.6 4.0
Code MAG 2021 109
EG II: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX- Handspring salto vaults with or without simple twists, and all double salto fwd.- Palomas con o sin giros y dobles mortales ad.
225. 226. 227. 228. 229. 230.
231. Renversement avant et double salto avant gr. 232. Roche avec ½ tour. 233. 234. Renv. av. et salto av. gr. avec ½ t. et salto arr. gr. 235. 236.
Handspring fwd. and dbl. salto fwd. t. Roche with ½ turn. Handspring fwd. and salto fwd. t. w. ½ t. and
Paloma doble mortal agrupado. Roche con ½ giro. salto bwd. t.
Paloma y mortal ad con ½ g. y mortal at. agr.
(Roche) (Dragulescu)
(Zimmerman)
5.2 5.6 5.6

237. 238. 239. 240. 241. Renversement av. et double salto av. carpé. 242. Dragulescu carpé.
Handspring fwd. and dbl. salto fwd. piked. Dragulescu piked.
Paloma doble mortal ad. en carpa. Dragulescu en carpa.
(Blanik) (RI Se Gwang 2)
5.6 6.0
243 244. 245. 246. 247. 248.
Code MAG 2021 110

EG III: Tsukahara vaults with or without simple twists, and all double salto bwd. - Handspring with ¼ or ½ turn in the 1st flight phase - Saltos con ¼ o ½ g. en la fase de vuelo
301. Renversement lat. avec ¼ t. et salto arr. gr. 302. Tsukahara carpé. 303.Tsukahara gr. avec ½ t. 304. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. et salto av. gr. 305. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. et salto av. gr. 306. Renversement lat. avec ¼ t. et salto av. ca.
Handspring sw. w. ¼ t. a. salto bwd. t. Tsukahara piked. Tsukahara t. with ½ t. avec ½ t. ou Tsukahara avec 1/1 t. Hdspr. sw. with. ¼ t. a. salto fwd. t. Handspring sw. w. ¼ t. a. salto fwd. p.
Rondada con ¼ g. y mortal atrás agrupado. Tsukahara en carpa. Tsukahara agrupado con ½ g. Hdspr. sw. w. ¼ t. a. salto fwd. t. w. ½ t. or Tsuk. t. w. 1/1 t. Rondada con ¼ g. y mortal adelante agrupado. Rondada con ¼ g. y mortal adelante en carpa.
(Tsukahara) Rond. con ¼ g. y mortal ad. agr. con ½ g. o Tsuk. agr. con
1/1 g.
2.2 2.4 2.4 2.8 (Kasamatsu)

2.4 2.8
307. 308. 309. 310. 311. Tsukahara tendu. 312. Tsukahara tendu avec ½ t.
Tsukahara stretched. Tsukahara str. with ½ t. or Hdspr. sw ¼ t. salto
Tsukahara extendido. fwd str.
Tsukahara extendido con ½ g.
3.2 3.6
313. Tsukahara tendu a. 1/1 t. ou Kasamatsu t. 314. 315. 316. 317. 318.
Tsukahara str. w. 1/1 t. or Kasamatsu str.
Tsukahara ext. con 1/1 g. o Kasamatsu ext.
4.0
319. 320. 321. Tsukahara avec salto arrière gr. 322. Tsukahara avec salto arrière carpe. 323. Tsukahara double salto arrière gr. avec 1/1 t. 324.
Tsukahara with salto bwd. t. Tsukahara with salto bwd. piked. Double Tsukahara with 1/1 twist.
Tsukahara con mortal atrás agrupado. Tsukahara con mortal atrás en carpa. Doble Tsukahara con 1/1 giro.
(Yeo) (Lu Yu Fu) (Ri Se Gwang)
5.2 5.6 6.0

Code MAG 2021 111
EG IV: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX - Round off entry vaults.- Saltos con entrada de rondada
401. Rondade, renversement arrière. 402. Rondade, renversement arrière avec ½ tour. 403. Rondade, renversement arrière avec 1/1 tour. 404. Rondade, renversement arrière et salto arr. gr. 405. Yurchenko groupé avec ½ t. 406. Yurchenko groupé avec 1/1 t.
Round off, handspring bwd. Round off, handspring bwd. with ½ turn. Round off, handspring bwd. with 1/1 turn. Round off, hdspr. bwd. and salto bwd. t. Yurchenko t. with ½ t. Yurchenko t. with 1/1 t.
Rondada, inversión atrás. Rondada, inversión atrás con ½ g. Rondada, inversión atrás con 1/1 g. Rondada, inversión atrás y mortal atrás agr. Yurchenko agrupado con ½ g. Yurchenko agrupado con 1/1 g.
(Yurchenko)
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.8

407. Yurchenko groupé avec 3/2 t. 408. Yurchenko groupé avec 2/1 t. 409. Yurchenko carpé. 410. Yurchenko tendu. 411.Yurchenko tendu avec ½ t. 412. Yurchenko tendu avec 1/1 t.
Yurchenko t. with 3/2 t. Yurchenko t. with 2/1 t. Yurchenko piked. Yurchenko stretched. Yurchenko stretched with ½ t. Yurchenko stretched with 1/1 t.
Yurchenko agrupado con 3/2 g. Yurchenko agrupado con 2/1 g. Yurchenko en carpa. Yurchenko ext. Yurchenko ext. con ½ g. Yurchenko extendido con 1/1 g.
3.2 3.6 2.4 3.2 3.6 4.0

413. Yurchenko tendu avec 3/2 t. 414. Yurchenko tendu avec 2/1 t. 415. Yurchenko tendu avec 5/2 t. 416. Yurchenko tendu avec 3/1 t. 417. Yurchenko et salto arr. gr. 418. Melissanidis carpé.
Yurchenko stretched with 3/2 t. Yurchenko stretched with 2/1 t. Yurchenko stretched with 5/2 t. Yurchenko Stretched 3/1 t. Yurchenko and salto bwd. t. Melissanidis piked.
Yurchenko extendido con 3/2 g. Yurchenko extendido con 2/1 g. Yurchenko extendido con 5/2 g. Yurchenko extendido con 3/1 g. Yurchenko y mortal at. agr. Melissanidis en carpa.
(Shewfelt) (Shirai - KIM Hee Hoon) (Melissanidis) (Yang Wei)
4.4 4.8 5.2 5.6 5.2 5.6

419. 420. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant. 421. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement av. avec ½ t. 422. Rondade, ½ t. et renv. av. avec 1/1 t. 423. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement av. et salto 424. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto
Round off, ½ t. and handspring fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. with ½ t. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. with 1/1 t. avant groupé. av. groupé avec ½ t.
Rondada, ½ g. paloma. Rondada, ½ g. paloma con ½ g. Rondada, ½ g. paloma con 1/1 g. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd.
tucked. tucked with ½ t.
Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal agrupado. Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal agrupado con ½ g.
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.6 3.0

Code MAG 2021 112
425. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 426. Rondade, ½ t. et renvs. av. et salto av. ca. avec ½ t. 427. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 428. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 429. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 430. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto
avant carpè. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. avant tendu. avant tendu a. ½ t. avant tendu a. 1/1 t. avant tendu a. 3/2 t.
Round off, ½ t. a. hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. p. p. with ½ t. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd.
Rondada, ½ g. paloma doble mortal en carpa. Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal en carpa con ½ g. str. str. with ½ t. str. with 1/1 t. stretched with 3/2 t.
Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal adelante ext. Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal adelante ext. Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal adelante exten- Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal ad. ext. con 3/2 g.
(Nemov)
con ½ g. dido con 1/1 g.
3.0 3.4 3.8 4.2 (Hutcheon) 4.6 5.0

431. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 432. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement avant et salto 433. Rondade, ½ t. et renversement av. et double 434. 435. 436.
avant tendu a. 2/1 t. avant tendu avec 5/2 t. salto avant groupé.
Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. and hdspr. fwd. and salto fwd. Round off, ½ t. a. hdspr. fwd. and double salto
stretched with 2/1 t. str. with 5/2 t. fwd. tucked.
Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal ad. ext. con 2/1 g. Rondada, ½ g. paloma mortal ad ext con 5/2 g. Rondada, ½ g. paloma doble mortal ad. agr.
(Li Xiao Peng)
5.4 5.8 5.4

437. 438. 439. 440. 441. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 442. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse-
ment arrière. ment arrière avec ½ tour.
Scherbo entry to back handspring. Scherbo entry to back handspring with ½
Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás. turn.
Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás con ½ g.
2.2 2.4
443. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 444. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 445. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 446. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 447. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 448. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse-
ment arrière avec 1/1 tour. ment arrière et salto arrière groupé. ment arrière et salto arrière carpé. ment arrière et salto arrière groupé avec ½ t. ment arrière et salto arrière groupé avec 1/1 t. ment arrière et salto arrière groupé avec 3/2 t.
Scherbo entry to back handspring with 1/1 Scherbo entry to salto bwd. tucked. Scherbo entry to salto bwd. piked. Scherbo entry to salto bwd. tucked with ½ turn. Scherbo entry to salto bwd. tucked with 1/1 Scherbo entry to salto bwd. tucked with 3/2
turn. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agr. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás en carpa. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado turn. turn.
Entrada de Scherbo e inversión atrás con 1/1 g. con ½ g. Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado Entrada de Scherbo y mortal atrás agrupado
con 1/1 g. con 3/2 g.
2.6 2.8 3.0 3.0 3.4 3.8

Code MAG 2021 113
449. Rondade, saut arrière avec 1/1 t. et renverse- 450. Scherbo avec ½ t. 451. Scherbo avec 1/1 t. 452. Scherbo avec 3/2 t. 453. Scherbo avec 2/1 t. 454. Scherbo avec 5/2 t.
ment arrière et salto arrière tendu. Scherbo with ½ t. Scherbo with 1/1 t. Scherbo with 3/2 t. Scherbo with 2/1 t. Scherbo with 5/2 t.
Scherbo entry to salto bwd. stretched. Scherbo con ½ g. Scherbo con 1/1 g. Scherbo con 3/2 g. Scherbo con 2/1 g. Scherbo con 5/2 g.
Entrada de Scherbo mortal at ext. (Shirai 3)
(Scherbo)
3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.4 5.8

455. 456. 457. 458. 459. 460.
461. 462. 463. 464. 465. 466.
467. 468. 469. 470. 471. 472.
Code MAG 2021 114

EG V: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX - Simple Vaults - Saltos Simples
501. Renversement avant. 502. Renversement avant avec ½ t. 503. Renversement avant avec 1/1 t. 504. Renversement avant avec 3/2 t. 505. 506. Renversement avant avec 2/1 t.
Forward handspring. Forward handspring with ½ t. Forward handspring with 1/1 t. Forward handspring with 3/2 t. Forward handspring with 2/1 t.
Paloma. Paloma con ½ g. Paloma con 1/1 g. Paloma con 3/2 g. Paloma con 2/1 g.
1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4

507. Renversement avant avec 5/2 t. 508. 509. 510. 511. Renversement latéral avec ¼ t. 512. Renversement latéral avec 3/4 t.
Forward handspring with 5/2 t. Handspring sw. with ¼ t. Handspring sw. with 3/4 t.
Paloma con 5/2 g. Rondada con ¼ g. Rondada con 3/4 g.
(Tsygankov)
2.6 1.6 1.8

513. Renversement latéral avec 5/4 t. 514. 515. 516. 517. 518.
Handspring sw. with 5/4 t.
Rondada con 5/4 g.
2.0
519. 520. 521. 522. 523. 524.
Code MAG 2021 115

Section 14: Parallel Bars
Height: 180 cm from top of mat, 200 cm from floor.
Article 14.1 Exercise Description

A contemporary parallel bar exercise consists predominantly of swing
and flight elements selected from all available Element Groups and
performed with continuous transitions through various hang and
support positions in such a way as to reflect the full potential of the
apparatus.

1. The gymnast must initiate his Parallel Bar mount or his run-up
from a still stand with legs together. The exercise begins the mo-
ment the feet leave the ground. Swinging with one leg or stepping
into the mount is not permitted. The feet must leave the ground
simultaneously.
2. A vaulting board placed at the height of the regulation landing mats
is permitted for the mount.
3. Pre-elements are not permitted. This means that any element that
rotates more than 180º around any body axis may not be performed
prior to grasping the rail or rails with the hands.
with complete safety and a high degree of aesthetic and techni-
cal mastery.
5. Additional execution and exercise construction expectations are:
a) Back swings in support or upper arm hang that do not lead to at
least a value part but simply reverse direction and swing back
down in or to a lower hang or support position are deducted,
i.e:
• Back swing in upper arm hang, layaway to glide kip.
• Back swing in support, layaway to front uprise.
• Back swing in support, layaway to hang.
• Glide kip to upper arm hang or to momentary support and
lay back to upper arm hang.
• From handstand, lower to shoulder roll forward.
b) No extra support is allowed during elements with turns on
one arm support. Elements such as giant swing with turn,
backward uprise with turn, forward uprise with full turn, Felge
elements with turn, etc. will be considered finished where the
extra support occurs.
c) All elements in hang followed by kips must be executed with
Code MAG 2021 116

straight legs.
d) The following elements or groups of elements are not permit-
ted:
• Strength and hold elements that are not listed in the dif-
ficulty tables.
• Saltos and dismounts from side hang on one bar.
• Saltos with reception in upper arms and/or bent arms
support for juniors.
e) Elements performed to one bar (Chiarlo, Piasecky, etc..) must
be executed to a handstand with hands slightly apart. A slight
deviation of the shoulders/body is permitted because of the
unnatural hand position. Deductions will be taken for excessive
hand separation and/or body deviation.
f) On all Moy and Giant bwd. swings, legs may not bend until
body is horizontal.
g) The deduction for lack of extension before regrasping after
saltos means the extension (opening) should be at horizontal
(bar height).
h) The correct front uprise amplitude is showing the back mini-
mum horizontal with the bars line, lest angle will have a small
deduction.
h) A front uprise to L sit can be deducted for lack of amplitude in
the uprise, 0.1 or 0.3.
and 14.3.

I. Elements in support or through support on 2 bars.
II. Elements starting in upper arm position.
III. Long swings in hang on 1 or 2 bars and underswings.
IV. Dismounts.
2. Information on difficulty value:
a) For elements which include turns, the turns are not recognized
as part of the element if the turn happens after the handstand
position or after a hop to handstand. Examples: basket with
inlocation and hop to handstand with turn or giant swing half
turn with hop to handstand followed by turns.
b) Unless otherwise indicated, elements that deliberately re-
grasp in bent arm support are considered to have the same
identification number and value as elements which re-grasp
in upper arm hang. However, elements that are initiated from
bent arm support are considered to have the same identifica-
tion number and value as elements from or through support.
c) Unless otherwise indicated in the difficulty tables, elements
performed from or to unusual or rotated grip positions (supi-
nated or pronated) have the same identification number and
value as analogous elements performed from or to the usual
grip position.
d) Elements formed by combined independent elements must
demonstrate no pause between elements, or they will receive
their independent values.
Code MAG 2021 117

e) In the Qualifications or Team Finals, for preparation of the
Parallel Bars prior to an exercise (during the one-touch warm-
up and competition), any FOP accredited person from the
federation of the gymnasts may assist. In the All-Around or
Apparatus Finals, a maximum of three people (the competing
gymnast, coach, and 1 other FOP accredited person may be
on the podium to prepare the bars. CHANGE TO GENERAL
PART.
a) Many swinging elements lead to or are defined to a handstand
on one or two rails. The handstands from swing need not be
held but the element must be performed in a manner that
convincingly demonstrates that the handstand position could
have been held if so desired.
b) Special rule: Elements to one bar in cross support have the
same value as done to two bars, except they increase by one
value more when connected to Healy type elements (each
Healy element also increases by one value)- hold is allowed
in the one bar handstand.
c) Elements to one bar upgrade the value if is connected to healy
type elements, but only if the healy element is executed without
large deduction.
d) No straddle element to one bar can receive an increase in
difficulty value, i.e. Tippelt, Arican, etc.
e) How to evaluate Makuts type elements with a pause or stop
during the first part of the element:
Performance D-jury E-jury
Pause after first part Give value -0.1 for Pausing or
of element Stopping in Hand-
stand
One second hold Give value -0.3 for Pausing or
after first part of Stopping in Hand-
element (less than 2 stand
seconds)
Two second hold No value -0.5 for Pausing or

after first part of Stopping in Hand-
element stand
For example: Makuts to handstand with less than a one second

hold after the ¾ Diamidov and then ¾ Healy = E value and
-0.1 for Pausing or Stopping in handstand.
f) All Healys must have 360° or more turns to be recognized as
a Healy type element.
i.e. From a swing element (minimum B value) to handstand
on one bar sideways, requires a Healy (450° turn) to support
for an E value.
Note: A ¾ Healy, from sideways position, is a B value and
same box as Element I.50.
g) Performance expectation of Bhavsar. This element should be
Code MAG 2021 118

performed to regrasp with an open shoulder angle and straight
body at horizontal. If the gymnast regrasps with a body posi-
tion of more than 45° from horizontal and/or a 90° angle in the
shoulder, no value will be given and a single large deduction
will be taken.
h) Healy and Makuts type turns, with an extreme arm bend
(greater than 90 degrees.) upon catching, will not be recog-
nized for value.
i) A double salto forward with a ½ turn may be performed for
value with either a late turn or an early turn on the ½ twist.
j) Tippelt performance expectations. The Tippelt is considered a
swing element and as such must be performed with continuous
movement. The legs must rise upon regrasp to the handstand
position with no dropping of the legs or visible use of strength.
Dropping of the legs, interruption in the upward movement or
visible use of strength can result in execution deductions and
possible non-recognition of the element.
a) Elements with saltos: an exercise can not include more than
one variation of the same element (within the same EG). In
this case the element with the highest difficulty value will be
counted for difficulty.
Some examples:
- Morisue tuck or Morisue pike.
- Belle tuck or Belle pike.
- 5/4 Salto fwd straddled to up. arm hang or to bent arm
support or through support to hang/directly to hang.
For clarification, the following elements collectively are in-
cluded III.47, III.58, III.59, and III.65 in this rule.
b) Maximum two Giant Swings through handstand (III. 21, 22,
28, 29 & 35).
c) Maximum two Basket Swings through handstand (III. 106, 107,
108, 114, 119, 120, 123, 124, 130,136).XXXXXXXX
ments and other aspects of the D score, see Section 7 and the
summary of deductions in Articles 9.4 and 14.3.
Code MAG 2021 119

Article 14.3 Specific Deductions for Parallel Bars
D Jury
Error Deduction
Non respect of the official 0.30 from the Final Score (D1 Judge) for
warm up time (50’’). individual competition or 1.00 from team
score for team competition.
E Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
One leg step or swing on
+
mount.
Layaway on the back swing.
+
Not controlled momentary

handstand positions on 1
+
or 2 rails.
Elements Chiarlo type,

excessive hand separation
+ + +
and/or body deviation (each).
Pre-element. +
Stepping or hand adjust-
+
ments in handstand.
each time
Lack of extension at
horizontal regrasping after + +
saltos.
Uncontrolled regrasping
+ +
after saltos.
Moy and giants, bent legs
before horizontal body.
+ +
After Bhavsar or similar

horizontal regrasping ele-
ments to hang glide kip with +
bent legs.
Code MAG 2021 120

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Éléments en appui ou par l’appui sur les 2 barres - Elements in support or through support on 2 bars - Elementos en apoyo o por el apoyo sobre dos bandas
1. Tout appui renversé sur 1 ou 2 b.(2 s.). 2. De l’appui bras fléchis, établis. av. et sauté avec 3. Demi-tour en avant à l’appui renversé (sur 1 ou 2 4. 5. 6.
Any handstand on 1 or 2 rails (2 s.). ½ t. à l’appui. barres).
Todo apoyo invertido en 1 o 2 bandas (2 s.). Bent arm swing fwd. to hop ½ t. to sup. Stützkehr fwd. to hdst.(to 1 or 2 bars).
Del apoyo flex. dominación adelante y salto con Stützkehre adelante al apoyo invertido (en 1 o
½ g. al apoyo. 2 bandas).
(Kato)
7. Toutes les équerres (2 s.). 8. Élan en avant avec 1/1 t. à l’appui brachial. 9. Passer les jambes éc. en arr. directement à la 10. Demi-tour en av. ou salto en arr. à l’appui renvs. 11. 12.
Any L-sit on 1 or 2 rails (2 s.). Swing fwd. w. 1/1 t. to up. arm hang. suspension. lat. sur 1 b. (aussi av. ¼ t. ou ¾ à l’appui renvs.).
Cualquier ángulo (2 s.). Impulso adelante con 1/1 g. al apoyo braquial. Straddle cut bwd. directly to hang Stützkehr fwd. or salto bwd. to hdst. sideways on
Pasar las p. ab. atrás directamente a la susp. 1 rail (also with additional ¼ or ¾ turn to hdst.).
(Carminucci)
(Babos) Stützkehre ad. o mortal atrás al apoyo inv. lat.
sobre 1 brazo (también con ¼ o ¾ g. al apoyo inv.).
(Bilozerchev - Peters) (Dimic)
13. Passer les jambes écartées en avant à l’appui 14. Passer jambes éc. en arr. à l’appui renversé. 15. Diamidov avec ½ tour à l’appui brachial. 16. ¾ Diamidov et sauté en app. dorsal à la susp. latérale. 17. 18.
ou l’équerre (2 s.). Straddle cut bwd. to hdst. Diamidov and ½ turn to upper arms. ¾ Diamidov and rear vault to side hang on 1 bar.
Straddle cut fwd. to support or L-sit (2 s.). Pasar las p. abiertas atrás al apoyo invertido. Diamidov con ½ giro a braquial. ¾ Diamidov y salto dorsal a la suspensión lat.
Pasar las p. ab. ad. al apoyo o a ángulo (2 s.). (Salazar) (De Freitas)
19. Passer jambes écartées en arrière à l’appui. 20. Passer jambes écartées en arrière et salto av. 21. Élan en av. 1/1 t. avec appui sur 1 bras à l’appui 22. Diamidov avec ¼ ou ½ t. à l’appui renversé. 23. 24.
Straddle cut bwd. to support. à l’appui brachial. renversé. Diamidov with ¼ or ½ t. to hdst.
Pasar las piernas abiertas atrás al apoyo. Strad. cut bwd. and salto fwd. to up. arm hang. Swing fwd. w. 1/1 t. on 1 arm to hdst. Diamidov con ¼ o ½ g. al apoyo invertido.
Pasar las piernas abiertas atrás y mortal ad. al Impulso ad. 1/1 g. con apoyo sobre 1 brazo al
apoyo braquial. apoyo invertido.
(Diamidov)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. S’élever corps t., bras fl. ou corps fl., bras t. à l’appui 27. Makuts à l’appui brachial ou ¾ Diamidov ¼ 28. Demi-tour en avant avec 5/4 tour a l’a.t.r. sur 29. ¾ Diamidov et ¾ Healy sur l’autre main à l’appui. 30. Demi-tour en avant avec 5/4 tour a l’a.t.r. sur
renversé, sur 1 ou 2 barres (2 s.) aussi j. écartées. Healy à l’appui. un bras, et Healy à l’appui brachial. ¾ Diamidov & ¾ Healy on the other hand to supp. un bras, et Healy a l’appui.
Any press w. bent arm str. body, or str. arm bent Makuts to upper arm hang or ¾ Diamidov ¼ Swing forward with 5/4 t. on one arm through- ¾ Diamidov y ¾ Healy en la otra mano al apoyo. Swing forward with 5/4 t. on one arm through
body to hdst., on 1 or 2 rails (2 s.) also straddled. Healy to support. hdst. and healy to up. arm. hdst. and healy to support.
(Makuts)
Elev. cuer. y b. flex. o cuer. flex. b. ext. al ap. Makuts a braquial o ¾ Diamidov ¼ Healy al Impulso ad. con 5/4 g. al apoyo invertido en un Impulso adelante con 5/4 g. al apoyo invertido
inv., en 1 o 2 bandas (2 s.) también piernas ab. apoyo. brazo a través de healy al apoyo braquial. en un brazo a través de healy al apoyo.
(Zonderland)
31. 32. Élan en av. à l’appui renversé et saut à l’appui. 33. Salto arr. à l’appui renversé. Aussi arrivée sur 34. Salto arrière avec passer les jambes écartées. 35. 36.
Swing fwd. to hdst., hop to support. 1 barre. en avant à l’appui.
Impulso ad. al apoyo invertido y salto al apoyo. Salto bwd to handstand. Also to one rail. Salto backward with straddle cut to support.
Mortal atrás al apoyo invertido. También a una Mortal atrás con pase de piernas abiertas
(Carballo) banda. adelante al apoyo.
37. 38. 39. 40. Salto arrière à l’appui renversé sur 1 b. susp. 41. 42.
(enchaîné avec des éléments de type Healy)
Salto bwd to handstand 1 rail (connected to
Healy type element).
Mortal atrás al apoyo invertido sobre una banda
(conectado con elementos del tipo Healy)
(Rumbutis)
43. 44. 45. Salto arrière avec ½ t. à l’appui. brachial. 46. Double salto arrière gr. à l’appui brachial. 47. Double salto arrière carpé à l’appui brachial. 48.
Salto bwd. with ½ t. to up. arm hang. Double salto t. to up. arm hang. Double salto p. to up. arm hang.
Mortal atrás con ½ g. al apoyo braquial. Doble mortal agrupado al apoyo braquial. Doble mortal en carpa al apoyo braquial.
(Toumilovich) (Morisue) (Huang Liping)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. L’appui renversé ¼ t. et ¼ t. à l’appui. 51. L’appui renversé. ¾ t. et ¼ t. à l’appui. 52. 3/2 salto arrière avec ½ t. à l’appui brachial. 53. 54.
Hdst. with ¼ t. and fall back to sup. with ¼ t. Hdst. with ¾ t. and fall back to sup. with ¼ t. 3/2 salto bwd. with ½ t. to up. arm hang.
Del apoyo invertido ¼ g. y ¼ g al apoyo. Del apoyo invertido ¾ g. y ¼ g al apoyo. 3/2 mortal atrás con ½ g. al apoyo braquial.
(Brändström) (Suarez)
55. 56 57. Demi-tour en arrière en pass. les jambes écar- 58. 59. 60.
tées en arrière à l’appui.
Stützkehr bwd. with straddle cut bwd. to sup.
Stützkehre atrás pasando las piernas abiertas
atrás al apoyo.
61. 62. Demi-tour en arrière à l’appui. 63. Demi-tour en arrière par l’appui renverse à 64. 65. 66.
Stützkehr bwd. to support. l’appui.
Stützkehre atrás al apoyo. Stützkehr bwd. through hdst. to support.
Stützkehre atrás por el apoyo inv. al apoyo.
(Novikov)
67. 68. Healy à l’appui brachial (aussi de l’appui ren- 69. Depuis une élément d’élan (min. B) l’appui 70. Healy à l’appui (aussi de l’appui renversé sur 1 71. Depuis une élément d’élan (min. B) à l’appui 72.
verse sur 1 barre). renverse sur 1 b., Healy à l’appui brachial. barre). renv. sur 1 barre, Healy (360° ou plus) à l’appui.
Healy to upper arm hang (also from hdst. on Following a swing element (min. B) to hdst hdst. Healy to support (also from hdst. on 1 rail). Following a swing element (min. B) to hdst on
1 rail). on 1 rail, Healy to upper arm hang. Healy al apoyo (también del apoyo invertido 1 rail, Healy (360° or more) to support.
Healy al apoyo braquial (también del apoyo Desde un elemento de impulso (mínimo B) al sobre 1 b.). Desde un elemento de impulso (mínimo B) al
invertido sobre 1 b.). apoyo invertido sobre 1 banda, Healy al apoyo (Healy) apoyo invertido sobre 1 banda, Healy (360° o
braquial. más) al apoyo.
(Bejenaru)
Min.
B
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. Élancé en arrière avec ½ t. sauté à l’appui 75. Élancé en arrière avec ¾ t. sauté à l’appui renversé. 76. Élancé en arrière avec 1/1 t. sauté à l’appui ren- 77. Gatson 1 avec ¼ t. à l’appui renversé. sur 1 b. 78.
renversé. Swing bwd. with ¾ t. hop to hdst. versé. et ¼ t. à l’appui renversé sur les 2 barres.
Swing bwd. with ½ t. hop to hdst. Lanzarse atrás con ¾ g. de salto al apoyo Swing bwd. with 1/1 t. hop to hdst. Gatson 1 with ¼ t to hdst. on 1 rail and ¼ t.
Lanzarse atrás con ½ g. de salto al apoyo invertido. Lanzarse atrás con 1/1 g. de salto al apoyo hdst. on 2 rails.
invertido. invertido. Gatson 1 con ¼ g. al apoyo invertido sobre 1
(Gatson 1) b. y ¼ g. al apoyo invertido sobre 2 bandas.
(Gatson 2)
79. Tout appui renversé avec ½ t. avant (aussi avec 80. Tout 1/1 t. en appui renversé sur 2 barres. 81. 82. 83. 84.
2 s.). Any 1/1 pirouette in hdst. on 2 rails.
Any hdst. with ½ turn fwd. (also with 2 s.). Todo 1/1 g. en apoyo invertido sobre 2 bandas.
Todo apoyo invertido con ½ g. (también con 2 s.).
85. ½ t. arrière en appui renversé. (aussi avec 2 s.). 86. De l’appui renversé sur 1. barre, ½ ou ¾ t. avant 87. 88. 89. 90.
½ turn bwd. in handstand (also with 2 s.). ou arrière en appui renversé.
½ g. atrás en apoyo invertido (también con 2 s.). From hdst. on 1 rail, ½ or ¾ pir. fwd. or bwd. in
hdst.
Del apoyo invertido sobre 1 banda ½ o ¾ g.
adelante o atrás en apoyo invertido.
91 92. 93. De l’appui renversé, salto av. à l’appui ou de 94. 95. 5/4 salto av. écarté par appui à la suspension 96.
l’appui renvs. prises tourn.,disloquer à l’appui. ou directement à la suspension.
From hdst., salto fwd to support or from hdsd. 5/4 salto fwd. strad. through support to hang or
with rotated grip, inlocate to support. directly to hang.
Del apoyo invertido, mortal adelante al apoyo 5/4 mortal ad. p. abiertas a través del apoyo a
invertido girando presa, bajando al apoyo. la suspensión o directamente a la suspensión.
(Carballo 2) (Lee Chul Hon/Sasaki)
Cam biar
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. 5/4 salto av. groupé ou carpé à l’appui brachial. 99. Salto avant à l’appui. 100. 5/4 salto avant écarté à l’appui brachial. 101. 5/4 salto avant écarté à l’appui bras fléchi. 102.
5/4 salto fwd. t. or p. to upper arm hang. Salto fwd to support. 5/4 salto fwd. straddled to up. arm hang. 5/4 salto fwd. strad. to bent arm sup.
5/4 mortal adelante agrupado o en carpa al Mortal adelante al apoyo. 5/4 mortal adelante piernas abiertas al 5/4 mortal adelante piernas abiertas al apoyo
apoyo braquial. apoyo braquial. brazos flexionados.
103. 104. Salto avant groupé ou carpé avec ¼ t. à la 105. Salto avant groupé ou carpé à la suspension sur 106. Double salto groupé avant à l’appui brachial. 107. Double salto carpé avant à l’appui brachial. 108.
suspension latérale sur 1 barre. l’extrémité des barres. Double salto fwd. t. to up. arm hang. Double salto fwd. p. to up. arm hang.
Salto fwd. t. or p. with ¼ t. to hang on 1 rail. Salto fwd. t. or p. to hang at the end of the bars. Doble mortal adelante agrupado al apoyo Doble mortal adelante en carpa al apoyo
Mortal adelante agrupado o en carpa con ¼. Mortal adelante agrupado o en carpa a la braquial. braquial.
a la suspensión lateral sobre 1 banda. suspensión sobre el extremo de las bandas.
109. 110. 111. 5/4 salto avant tendu à l’appui brachial. 112. 113. Salto av. avec 1/1 t. à l’appui brachial. 114.
5/4 salto forward str. to upper arm hang Salto fwd. with 1/1 t. to up. arm hang.
5/4 mortal adelante extendido al apoyo bra- Mortal con 1/1 g. al apoyo braquial.
quial.
(Urzica)
115. Sur l’extrémité des barres, 1 cercle de jambes 116. Au centre ou vers l’extrémité, 1 cercle de 117. Sur l’extrémité des barres, double facial russe 118. 119. 120.
serrées ou écartées. jambes serrées ou écartées. (360°).
On end, 1 circle or flair. In center or on end facing out, 1 circle or flair. On end, Russian wende swing (360°).
En el extr. de las bandas, 1 molino o molino En el centro o hacia el exterior, 1 molino o En el extremo de las bandas, doble rusa facial
piernas abiertas. molino piernas abiertas. (360°).
(Delesalle)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
121. 122. 123. Tout cercle écarté à l’appui renversé. 124. 125. 102.
Any flair to hdst.
Todo molino p. abiertas al apoyo invertido.
127. 128. 129. Tout cercle éc. avec ½ t. à l’appui renversé. 130. 131. 132.
Any flair with ½ t. to hdst.
Todo molino piernas abiertas con ½ g. al
apoyo invertido.
133. 134. 135. 136. 137. 138.
139. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG II: Éléments qui commencent à l’appui brachial - Elements starting in upper arm position- Elementos que empiezan en posición braquial
1. Établissement en avant à l’appui. 2. Établissement en avant et passer les jambes en 3. Établissement en avant et passer les jambes en 4. 5. Établissement en avant avec ½ t. à l’appui 6.
Forward uprise to support. arrière l’appui renversé. arrière à la suspension. renversé.
Dominación ad. al apoyo. Fwd. uprise and straddle cut bwd to handstand. Fwd. uprise and straddle cut bwd to hang. Fwd. uprise with ½ t. to handstand.
Dominación adelante pasando las piernas atrás Dominación adelante pasando las piernas atrás a Dominación adelante con ½ g. al apoyo inver-
al apoyo invertido. la suspensión. tido.
(Muntean)
7. Établissement en avant avec ¼ t. à la suspen- 8. Rouler arrière avec ½ t. de l’appui brachial ou 9. 10. 11. Établissement en avant avec Makuts à l’appui 12. Établissement. en av. avec Makuts à l’appui.
sion latérale sur une barre établis en avant et Kato sauté à l’appui. brachial. Fwd. uprise to Makuts to support.
Fwd. uprise with ¼ t. to hang on 1 rail. Roll bwd. with ½ t. from up. arm. hang or Fwd. Fwd. uprise to Makuts to upper arm. Dominación adelante con Makuts al apoyo.
Dominación ad. con ¼ g. a la suspensión lateral uprise to Kato hop to sup. Dominación adelante con Makuts a braquial.
(Tsolakidis 1)
al exterior. Rodar atrás con ½ g. desde el apoyo braquial o
dominación ad. y Kato saltado al apoyo.
(Watanabe)
G
13. 14. Rouler arrière à l’appui renversé avec bras 15. 16. 17. Établissement en avant avec 1/1 t. à l’appui 18. Établissement. en av. avec 3/2 t. à l’appui renvs.
tendus. renversé. Fwd. uprise with 3/2 t. to handstand.
Roll bwd to handstand with straight arms. Fwd. uprise with 1/1 t. to handstand. Dominación adelante con 3/2 g. al apoyo inv.
Rodar atrás al apoyo invertido con brazos ext. Dominación adelante con 1/1 g. al apoyo inv.
(Richards) (Tsolakidis 2)
19. 20. Salto arrière et pass. les jambes avant à l’appui 21. Rouler arrière et pass. les jambes av. à l’appui. 22. 23. Rouler arrière et salto arrière groupé à l’appui 24. Rouler arrière et salto arrière carpé à l’appui
brachial. Roll bwd. with strad. cut to support. brachial. brachial.
Salto bwd. with strad. cut to up. arm hang. Rodar atrás y pasar las piernas adelante al Roll bwd with salto bwd tuck to upper arm hang. Roll bwd with salto bwd piked to upper arm hang.
Salto atrás pasando las piernas adelante al apoyo apoyo. Rodar atrás y mortal atrás agrupado al apoyo Rodar atrás y mortal atrás en carpa al apoyo
braquial. braquial. braquial.
(Dimitrenko) (Li Xiaopeng)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. 27. 28. Rouler arrière avec ½ t. gr. à l’appui brachial. 29. Rouler arrière avec ½ t. gr. à la susp. 30.
Roll bwd. with ½ t. tuck to upper arm hang. Roll bwd. with ½ t. tuck to hang.
Rodar atrás con ½ g. agrupado al apoyo bra- Rodar atrás con ½ g. agrupado a la suspensión.
quial.
(Harada) (Dalton)
31. 32. Établissement arrière à l’appui renversement 33. Établissement arrière avec ½ t. sauté à l’appui 34. Établissement arrière avec ¾ t. sauté à l’appui 35. 36.
(aussi avant ½ t). renversé. renversé sur 1 barre.
Bwd. uprise to handstand (or w. ½ t). Bwd. uprise with ½ t. hop to handstand. Bwd. uprise with ¾ t. hop to hdst. on 1 rail.
Dominación atrás al apoyo invertido (también Dominación atrás con ½ g. saltar al apoyo Dominación atrás con ¾ g. saltar al apoyo
con ½ g.). invertido. invertido sobre 1 banda.
37. 38. Établissement arrière avec ½ t. et passer les 39. Établissement arrière avec ½ t. et passer les 40. 41. 42.
jambes en arrière à l’appui brachial. jambes en arrière à l’appui.
Bwd. uprise with ½ t. and straddle cut bwd to Bwd. uprise with ½ t. a. strad. cut bwd. to sup.
upper arm hang. Dominación atrás con ½ g. y pasar las piernas
Dominación atrás con ½ g. y pasar las p. atrás atrás al apoyo.
al apoyo braquial.
43. 44. Établissement. arrière avec ½ t. à l’appui. 45. Établissement arrière et 5/4 salto avant groupé, 46. Établissement arrière et salto av. carpé à l’appui. 47. Établissement arrière et double salto av. groupè 48.
Bwd. uprise with ½ t. to support. carpé à l’appui brachial. Bwd. uprise and salto fwd. p. to sup. à l’appui brachial.
Dominación atrás con ½ g. al apoyo. Bwd. uprise and 5/4 salto fwd. t. to up.arm hang. Dominación atrás y mortal adelante en carpa al Bwd. uprise and double salto fwd. t. to up arm
Dominación atrás y 5/4 mortal adelante agrupa- apoyo. hang.
do, en carpa al apoyo braquial. Dominación atrás y doble mortal adelante
agrup. a braquial.
(Yamawaki)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. 52. 53. Établissement arrière et 5/4 salto av. écarté à 54.
l’appui brachial.
Bwd. uprise and 5/4 salto fwd. straddled to up.
arm hang.
Dominación atrás y 5/4 mortal adelante piernas
abiertas a braquial.
55. Établissement arrière et passer les jambes 56. Établissement arrière et passer les jambes 57. 58. 59. 60.
écartées en avant à l’appui bras fléchis. écartées en av. à l’appui bras tendus.
Bwd. uprise and strad. cut or flank over to sup. Bwd. uprise and strad. cut or flank over to sup.
bent arm. str. arm.
Dominación atrás pasando las piernas adelante Dominación atrás pasando las piernas adelante
al apoyo brazos flexionados. al apoyo brazos extendidos.
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66.
67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG III: Éléments d’élans par la suspension sur 1 ou 2 barres et établissements en avant en tournant en arrière. - Long swings in hang en 1 or 2 bars and Underswings - Elementos de impulso por la suspensión
sobre 1 o 2 bandas y dominaciones adelante volteando atrás.
1. 2. 3. Élan av. passer jambes écartées en arrière reprise 4. Moy carpé avec passer jambes écartées en 5. Élan av. passe jamb. éc. en arr. corps tendu a 6.
a l’appui brachial corps tendu a l’horizontal ou bras arrière à l’appui renversé l’horiz.
fléchis. Moy piked with straddle bwd to hdst. Swing forward, straddle cut backward, and
Swing forward, straddle cut backward, and regrasp Moy en carpa con pase de piernas abiertas regrasp with straight body at horizontal.
with straight body at horizontal to bent and upper arm. atrás al ap. inv. Imp. ad. pase piernas atrás y agarre ext. en la horiz.
Impulso adelante pase piernas atrás y agarre ext. (Tippelt) (Bhavsar)
en la horizontal a braquial y brazos doblados.
Bv
7. 8. Moy carpé en passant les jambes ec. en arrière 9. Moy carpé avec 1/1 t. à l’appui brachial. 10. Moy et salto av. groupé, carpé ou écarté a l’appui 11. 12.
avec ½ t. a l’appui brachial (aussi jambes serrées). Moy piked with 1/1 t. to up. arm hang. brachial.
Moy piked with stradd. cut bwd. and ½ t. to up. Moy en carpa con 1/1 g. al apoyo braquial. Moy and salto fwd. t., p. or strad. to upper arm
arm hang (also legs together). hang.
(Nolet)
Moy en carpa con piernas abiertas ½ g., al apoyo Moy y mortal adelante agrupado,en carpa o
braquial (también con piernas cerradas). piernas abiertas al apoyo braquial.
(Giraldo)
13. 14. Moy à l’appui jambes fléchies (aussi sans lâcher 15. Moy à l’appui avec les jambes tendues (aussi 16. 17. 18.
prises). sans lâcher prises).
Moy to support bent legs (also without grip Moy to support str. legs (also without grip
release). release).
Moy al apoyo piernas dobladas (también sin Moy al apoyo p. ext. (también sin dejar las
dejar las presas). presas). (Moy)
z
19. 20. 21. Grand tour arr. à l’appui renv. ou avec disloca- 22. Grand tour arrière à l’a.t.r. sur une barre (enchaîné 23. 24.
tion avant (aussi av. ¼ t ou ½ t. et sur 1 barre). avec un élément de type Healy).
Giant swing bwd. to hdst. or with inlocation fwd. Giant swing bwd. to hdst. on one rail (connected to
(also with ¼ or ½ turn and to one rail). Healy type element).
Molino al ap. inv. o con disloc. ad. (también con Molino al apoyo invertido en una banda (conectado
¼ o ½ g. o a 1 banda). con un elemento del tipo Healy).
(Kenmotsu) (Piasecky)
(Wells)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. 27. 28. Grand tour arrière avec Diamidov à l’appui 29. Grand tour Diamidov avec ¼ or ½ à l’app. renv. 30.
renversé, aussi sur 1 barre Giant swg. Diamidov with ¼ or ½ t. to hdst.
Giant swg. bwd. with Diamidov to hdst., also to Molino Diamidov con ¼ or ½ al apoyo invertido.
one rail.
Molino atrás con Diamidov al apoyo invertido.,
también a una banda
31. 32. S’abaisser avec salto arrière tendu à la sus- 33. Grand tour arrière avec ½ t. à l’appui brachial. 34. Grand tour arrière avec ½ t. à l’appui. 35. Grand tour arr. avec Diamidov à l’app. renv. 36. Belle avec 1/1 tour.
pension. Giant swing bwd. with ½ t. to up. arm hang. Giant swing bwd. with ½ t. to support. dans 1 barre (enchaîné avec un élément de Belle with 1/1 turn.
Swing down with salto bwd. str. to hang. Molino atrás con ½ g. al apoyo braquial. Molino atrás con ½ g. al apoyo. type Healy. Belle con 1/1 giro.
Bajarse con mortal atrás extensión a la sus- Giant swg. bwd. with Diamidov to hdst. one rail
pensión. (Gushiken) (Marinitch) (connected to Healy type element). (Quintero)
Molino at. con Diamidov al ap. inv. a una banda
(conectado con un elemento del tipo Healy).
G
Ma
37. 38. 39. 40. Grand tour arrière avec Makuts à l’appui bra- 41. 42. Grand tour arrière avec Makuts.
chial. Giant swing bwd. with Makuts.
Giant swing bwd. with Makuts to upper hang. Molino atrás con Makutsl.
Molino atrás con Makuts a braquial. (Baumann)
(Dauser)
43. 44. Grand tour arrière avec pass. i. jambes écartées 45. 46. Grand tour arrière avec pass. i. jambes écartées 47. Grand tour arrière avec ½ pass. jambes écartées 48.
à l’appui brachial. à l’appui ou bras fléchis. a l’appui brachial.
Giant swing bwd. w. strad. cut to up. arm hang. Giant swing bwd. with straddle cut to support or Giant swing bwd. with ½ t. and str. cut bwd. to
Molino atrás con pase de piernas abiertas al apoyo bent arms support. up. arms.
braquial. Molino atrás con pase de piernas abiertas al Molino atrás con ½ g. y pasar piernas abiertas
apoyo o brazos flex. atrás a braquial.
(Korolev) (Sosa)
So
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. 52. Du grand tour arrière, double salto groupe à l’appui 53. Belle carpé. 54.
brachial. Belle piked.
Fr. giant. sw. bwd., dbl. salto t. to up. arm hang. Belle en carpa.
De molino atrás doble mortal agrupada al apoyo
braquial.
(Belle)
55. 56. 57. Grand tour arrière et salto carpé avec ½ t. à la 58 Grand tour arrière et salto groupé ou carpé avec 59. Grand tour arrière et salto groupé ou carpé avec 60. Grand tour arrière avec ½ t. et 3/2 salto avant à
suspension sur l’extrémité. ½ t. à l’appui brachial ou suspension. ½ t. à l’appui. l’appui brachial.
Giant swing bwd. and salto with ½ t to hang on Giant swing bwd. and salto with ½ t or p. to up. Giant swing bwd. and salto with ½ t or p. to Giant swing bwd. with ½ t. and 3/2 salto fwd to up
the end. arm hang or hang. support. arm hang.
Molino atrás y mortal en carpa con ½ g. a la Molino atrás y mortal agrupado o en carpa con Molino atrás y mortal agrupado o en carpa con Molino atrás con ½ g. y 3/2 mortal adelante a
suspensión sobre el extreme. ½ g. al apoyo braquial o suspensión. ½ g. al apoyo. braquial.
(Chartrand) (Torres) (Tanaka)
E
61. Bascule d’élan sur une ou deux barres. 62. Bascule avec ½ t. à l’appui. 63. Bascule d’élan arrière à l’appui renversé. 64. 65. Grand tour arrière et salto tendu avec ½ t. à 66. Giant swing backward with ½ t. and 3/2 salto
Glide kip one or two rails. Glide kip. with 1/2 t. to support. Glide kip bwd. to hdst. l’appui brachial. forward piked to upper arm hang.
Báscula de impulso una o dos bandas. Báscula con ½ g. al apoyo invertido. Báscula de impulso atrás al apoyo invertido. Giant swing bwd. and salto with ½ str to up.
arm hang.
Molino atrás y mortal ext. con ½ g. al apoyo
braquial.
(Fokin) (Esparza)
67. 68. Bascule en passant les jambes écartées en 69. 70. 71. 72.
arrière à l’appui renversé sur 1 ou 2 barre.
Glide kip to strad. cut bwd. hdst. on 1 or 2 r.
Báscula pasando piernas abiertas al apoyo
invertido sobre 1 o 2 bandas.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. Bascule d’élan sur 1 barre par l’équerre jambes 75. Bascule d’élan par l’équerre jambes serrées à 76. Bascule d’élan par l’équerre jambes serrées à 77. 78.
écartées à l’appui renversé. l’appui renversé l’appui renversé et saut avec 3/4 t. ou plus.
Glide kip one rail through L-sit strad. to hdst. Glide kip through L-sit p. to hdst. Glide kip through L-sit p.to hdst. and hop with
Báscula de impulso en una banda piernas Báscula de impulso por el lat. al ap. invertido. 3/4 t or more.
abiertas al apoyo invertido. Báscula de imp. por el lat. al apoyo invertido y
salto.
79. 80. Bascule d’élan par l’équerre jambes lev. vert. et 81. 82. 83. 84.
saut avec ½ t. à la suspension sur l’autre barre.
Glide kip through V-sit and hop ½ turn to hang
on other rail.
Báscula de impulso por el lateral p. lev. vertical
y salto con ½ g. a la susp. sobre la otra banda.
(Li Donghua)
85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90.
91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. Bascule allemande à l’appui brachial. 98. Bascule allemande à l’appui. 99. Établissement. avant en tournant en arrière avec 100. Établissement avant en tournant en arrière 101. 102.
Cast to upper arm hang. Cast to support. ½ t. à l’appui brachial. avec ½ t. à l’appui.
Ballestón alemán a braquial. Ballestón alemán al apoyo. Felge with ½ t. to upper arm hang. Felge with ½ t. to rear support.
Dominación adelante volteando atrás con ½ g. Felge con ½ g. al apoyo por detrás.
a braquial.
103. 104. Bascule allemande avec ½ t. à l’appui brachial. 105. Bascule allemande avec ½ t. à l’appui. 106. Établissement av. en tournant en arr. à l’appui 107. Établissement avant en tournant en arrière 108. Établissement avant en tournant en arrière
Cast with ½ t. to up. arm hang. Cast with ½ t. to support. renv. ou avec dislocation, aussi sur 1 barre. avec ¼, ½ ou ¾ t. à l’appui renversé. avec 1/1 t. à l’appui renversé.
Ballestón alemán con ½ g al apoyo braquial. Ballestón alemán con ½ g. al apoyo. Basket to handstand or with inlocation (el-grip) Basket with ¼, ¾ or ½ t. to handstand. Basket with 1/1 t. to handstand.
and hop to hdst. Also to one rail. Felge con ¼, ½ o ¾ g. al apoyo invertido. Felge con 1/1 g. al apoyo invertido.
Felge al ap. inv. o con disloc. y salto al ap. inv. (Teng Hai Bin)
también a una banda
(Cucherat - Celen)
109. 110. 111. Bascule allemande avec pass. jambes écar- 112. 113. 114. Établissement avant en tournant en arrière
tées en arrière à l’appui renversé. avec 5/4 t. à l’appui renversé.
Cast to straddle cut backward to handstand. Basket with 5/4 t. to handstand.
Ballestón alemán pasando piernas abiertas Felge con 5/4 g. al apoyo invertido.
atrás al apoyo invertido. (Zhou Shixiong)
(Arican)
G
115. Établissement avant en tourn. avec transport 116. Établissement avant en tourn. à la appui. 117. Tour d’appui en pass. les jambes écartées 118. 119. Étab. av. en tournant en arr. à l’appui renv. 120. Étab. av. en tournant en arr. à l’appui renv.
à la suspension. Basket to support vers l’avant à l’appui. dans 1 barre.(enchaîné avec un élém. de type a Makuts.
Basket with travel to hang Felge al apoyo. Basket with immed. straddle cut to support. Healy). Basket through handstand to Makuts.
Felge con desplazamiento a la suspensión. Felge pasando las piernas abiertas adelante Basket to one rail hdst. (connected to Healy Felge a traves del apoyo invertido Makuts.
al apoyo. type element).
Felge al ap. inv. en una banda (conectado a
elemento del tipo Healy). (Yamamuro)
(Chiarlo)
G
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
121. 122. 123. Etablissement av. en tournant en arrière avec 124. Etablissement av. en tournant en arrière avec 125. Établissement avant en tourn. en arrière avec 126.
salto groupé et 1⁄2 tour à l’appui brachial. salto tendue et 1⁄2 tour à l’appui brachial. salto arrière groupe à l’appui brachial.
Basket roll backward with tuck salto ½ to upper Basket roll backward with str. salto ½ to upper Basket with salto bwd t. to up. arm hang.
arm hang. arm hang. Felge con mortal atrás agr. al apoyo braquial.
Felge con salto agrupado salto y ½ giro al Felge con salto ext. salto y ½ giro al apoyo
(Tejada)
apoyo braquial. braquial.
(Gagnon) (Gagnon 2)
Ga Ga 2
127. Tour d’appui avant à l’appui. 128. Tour d’appui avant avec ½ t. à l’appui. 129. 130. Établissement avant en tourn. en arrière avec 131. Établissement avant en tourn. en arrière avec 132.
Basket forward to support. Basket forward with ½ t. to support. ¼ t. à l’appui renversé. 3/4 t. à l’appui renversé.
Felge ad. al apoyo. Felge ad. con ½ g. al apoyo. Shoot up with ¼ t. to hdst. Shoot up with 3/4 t. to hdst.
Felge en una banda con¼ g. al apoyo invertido. Felge en una banda con 3/4 g. al apoyo
invertido.
(Nguyen)
133. 134. Établissement avant en tourn. en arrière à 135. 136. Établissement avant en tourn. en arrière écarté 137. 138.
l’appui renversé et saut sur l’autre barre. à l’appui renversé sur 1 barre.
Shoot up to hdst. and hop to other rail. Straddled shoot to hdst on 1 rail.
Felge en una banda saltando sobre la otra Felge en 1 banda piernas abiertas al apoyo
banda. invertido sobre 1 banda.
139. 140 141. 142. 143. 144.
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
1. Salto avant carpé ou tendu. 2. 3. Salto avant carpé ou tendu avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 4. Salto avant carpé ou tendu avec 2/1 ou 5/2 t. 5. Double salto avant groupe. 6. Double salto avant carpé.
Salto fwd. piked or stretched also with ½ t. Salto fwd. piked or str. with 1/1 or 3/2 t. Salto fwd. piked or str. with 2/1 or 5/2 t. Double salto fwd. t. Double salto fwd. piked.
Mortal adelante en carpa o extendido. Mortal adelante en carpa o extendido con 1/1 o Mortal adelante en carpa o extendido con 2/1 o Doble mortal adelante agrupado. Doble mortal adelante en carpa.
3/2 g. 5/2 g.
(Belyavskiy)
7. 8. 9. Double salto avant groupé de l’extrémité des 10. 11. Double salto av. gr. a. ½ t. ou ½ t. doub. salt. arr. 12.
barres. Double salto fwd. t. w. ½ t. or ½ t. doub. salt. bwd.
Double salto fwd. t. from end. Doble mortal ad. ag. c. ½ g. o ½ g. dob. mort. at.
Doble mortal ad. agrupado desde el extremo de
las bandas.
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Double salto avant carpé avec ½ t.
Double salto fwd. piked with ½ t.
Doble mortal adelante en carpa con ½ g.
(Dalaloyan)
19. Salto arrière carpé ou tendu. 20. Salto arrière carpé ou tendu avec ½ t. 21. Salto arrière carpé ou tendu avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 22. Salto arrière tendu avec 2/1 t. 23. 24. Double salto avant groupé avec 1/1 t.
Salto bwd. piked or str. Salto bwd. piked or str. with ½ t. Salto bwd. piked or str. with 1/1 or 3/2 t. Salto bwd. str. with 2/1 t. Double salto fwd. tucked with 1/1 t.
Mortal atrás en carpa o extendido. Mortal atrás en carpa o extendido con ½ g. Mortal atrás en carpa o extendido con 1/1 o 3/2 g. Mortal atrás en carpa o extendido con 2/1 g. Doble mortal adelante agrupado con 1/1 g.
(Kan) (Larduet)
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. 27. 28. Facial et salto arrière groupé ou carpé. 29. 30.
High wende and salto bwd t.or p.
Facial y mortal atrás agrupado o en carpa.
(Roethlisberger)
31 32. Double salto arrière groupé de l’extrémité des 33. Double salto arrière groupé. 34. Double salto arrière carpé. 35. 36. Double salto arrière groupé avec 1/1 t.
barres. Double salto bwd. t. Double salto bwd. pike. Double salto bwd. t. with 1/1 t.
Double salto bwd. t. from end. Doble mortal atrás agrupado. Doble mortal atrás en carpa. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 1/1 g.
Doble mortal agrupado atrás desde el extremo (Hiroyuki Kato)
de las bandas.
37. 38. 39. 40. Double salto arrière groupé avec ½ t. ou salto 41. 42.
arriéré ½ t. et salto avant groupé.
Double salto bwd. t. with ½ t. or salto bwd. ½ t.
to salto fwd. tucked.
Doble mortal atrás agrupado con ½ g. o mortal
atrás ½ g. y mortal adelante agrupado
43. De la suspension sur l’extrêmité, salto arrière 44. 45. De la suspension sur l’extrémité, double salto 46. De la suspension sur l’extrémité, double salto 46. De la suspension sur l’extrémité, double salto 48. De la suspension sur l’extrémité, double salto
tendu. arrière groupé. arrière carpé. arrière groupé avec 1/1 ou ½ t. arrière groupé avec 2/1 t.
From hang on end, salto bwd. stretched. From hang on end, double salto bwd. t. From hang on end, dbl. salto bwd. piked. From hang on end, dbl. salto bwd. t. with 1/1 or From hang on end, dbl. salto bwd. t. with 2/1 t.
De la suspensión en el extremo, mortal atrás De la suspensión en el extremo, doble mortal De la suspensión en el extremo, doble mortal ½ t. De la suspensión en el extremo, doble mortal
extendido. atrás agrupado. atrás. en carpa. De la suspensión en el extremo, doble mortal atrás agrupado con. 2/1 g.
atrás agrupado con. 1/1 o ½ g.
Section 15: Horizontal Bar
Height: 260 cm from top of mat, 280 cm from the floor.

A contemporary Horizontal Bar Exercise must be a dynamic
presentation that consists entirely of the fluid connection of swinging,
turning, and flight elements alternating between elements performed
near to and far from the bar in a variety of hand grips so as to
demonstrate the full potential of the apparatus.

1. The gymnast must jump or be assisted to a still or swinging hang
on the Horizontal Bar from a still stand with legs together or from
a short run, but always with good form. The evaluation begins
from the moment the gymnast leaves the floor. A cast is the only
movement permitted in order to begin an exercise without deduc-
tion. Excessive swings with shoulders and or hips above the bar
prior to the cast will be deducted 0.3.
with complete safety and a high degree of aesthetic and technical
mastery.
3. Other execution and exercise construction expectations are:
a) The exercise must consist entirely of swings without stops or pauses.
b) Deviations in swings to or through handstand, including any
kind of turns.
0º - 15º = no deduction
16º - 30º = - 0.1
31º - 60º = - 0.3
46º - 90º = - 0.5
Below horizontal = - 0.5 ded. & non-recognition (by the D jury)
NEW PICTURE
Code MAG 2021 138

Turning Elements finishing in mixed elgrip and double elgrip are
subject to the following deductions:
0° - 30° = no deduction
31° - 45° = - 0.1
46° - 90° = - 0.3
>90° = - 0.5 and non-recognition (by the D jury)
and non - recognition
c) Flight elements must demonstrate a conspicuous rise of the

body during the flight phase.
d) Backward swings to handstand that simply reverse direction
and swing back down in the reverse direction are deducted
(composition errors) each time with 0,30 points.
Specific examples of such layaways are:
• Following a kip cast or back uprise to handstand - layaway
to giant swing bwd., Stalder, free hip, ½ turn to el-grip, etc.
• Following a backward uprise to handstand and hop to
overgrip - swing forward to giant swing bwd., Stalder, free
hip, etc.
(Also other angle deductions also need to be applied for
missing the handstand position).
e) Any flight element with salto over the bar requires a giant swing
afterward or -0.3 (E-jury deduction).
f) For all Adler elements it is not required to enter from a hand-
stand position.
and 15.3.

1. The Element Groups are (EG):
I. Long hang swings with and without turns.
II. Flight elements.
III. In bar and Adler elements.
IV. Dismounts.
2. Information about Connections (CV).
Connection points can be awarded only in the following situations:
Code MAG 2021 139

Connection
Flight Flight
points
C value + C or higher
= 0,10
or vice versa
D or higher value + D or higher value
= 0,20
Must be inside the 10 counting elements.

Does not have to be inside the counting elements.
a) Unless otherwise indicated, the value and identification num-
bers of elements listed in the Difficulty Tables are the same if
performed from handstand, from a back swing, or from some
other position.
b) Unless otherwise indicated, elements have the same difficulty
value and identification number when performed with the
“wrong grip” or atypical grip positions.
c) Elements that end in a double elgrip have one letter superior
value than the same elements ending in one arm elgrip.
d) Unless listed in the Difficulty Tables, elements with or from feet
on the bar are not permitted (exception: Piatti elements).
e) Starting or re-grasping flight elements with one hand (or “wrong
grip”) has the same value and identification number as starting
or re-grasping with two hands.
d) Starting flight elements with any grip variation has the same
value and identification number as starting or re-grasping with
two hands.
e) Unless otherwise indicated re-grasping with any grip variation
has the same value and identification number as re-grasping
with two hands
f) Elements with turns must show the turns as an integral part of
the ement being performed and the turn must be initiated on
the way up (exception Endo type elements). All Endo, Stalder
and Weiler Elements with turn are divided up in two Elements
except Stalder Rybalko
Example:
Endo + 1/1 turn to El-Grip = B + C
Stalder + ½ turn to El-Grip = B + B
g) Elements with hops to handstand, which include turns, must
initiate the turn during the hop and must re-grasp with the
second hand only after the turn has been completed. A re-
grasp may occur initially with one hand and then the second
hand as the turn is completed. A hop element is considered
finished at the moment that both hands re-grasp the bar.
g) El-grip elements meet only the requirements for the Element
Group in which they are listed.
I. Flight elements from el-grip are considered to belong to
Element Group II.
II. Dismounts from el-grip are considered to belong to Ele-
ment Group IV.
Code MAG 2021 140

III. Endo swings in el-grip are considered to belong to Ele-
ment Group III.
i) Expectation for Rybalko:
• Prerequisite condition for Rybalko is both hands in el-grip
in end position.
• Visible hop and fluid turn, not the turn on supporting arm.
i) Clarifications for giants with hop and turn (Quast and Rybalko
style)
Quast:
• Visible hop and fluid turn, not turning on the supporting arm
Giant swing bwd. with hop 3/2 turn (into el-grip = Rybalko):
• Prerequisite condition is both hands in mixed el-grip or el-
grip in end position
• Visible hop and fluid turn, not turning on the supporting arm.
• Giant swing bwd. with hop 3/2 t. to one arm giant swing
(Rybalko to one arm giant swing) is the same value and box
as Rybalko to undergrip or mixed el-grip (Element I.51).
• A giant bwd. swing with hop and more than 3/2 turn is pro-
hibited (2/1 and more turn)
• This rule also applies to all Stalder with hop 3/2 turn (into
el-grip = Rybalko ) type elements
j) Turning elements in one hand support position must be con-
sidered as finished at the moment the gymnast re-grasps the
bar with the second hand.
k) Unless otherwise indicated, an element composed of two
separate elements will result in divided values when a grip
change occurs. (i.e. Endo in overgrip, change one hand to
undergrip, and 1/1 turn to el-grip = B+C).
4. Unless otherwise indicated, for elements of Group I and III, the
following principles are used for the determination of difficulty:
a) Value of the base element has been given a certain value.
• A ½ turn does not increase the difficulty.
• A 1/1 turn increases the difficulty by one letter.
• A1/1 turn or greater to both el-grip increases the difficulty
by two letters.
• A hop does not increase the difficulty.
• Re-grasp in double el-grip increases the difficulty by one
letter.
b) The element has the same value and identification number
whether it crosses the bar or not, as long as the amplitude
stipulations have been met.
5. Flight elements from el-grip and dismounts from el-grip or dorsal
hang have the same value as elements performed in regular grip.
a) A maximum of two Stoop Circle Rearward forward through
handstand elements (Adler type) are permitted. In this case
the elements with the highest difficulty value will be counted.
b) Elements with turns: an exercise cannot include more than one
grip variation of the same element. In this case the elements
with the highest difficulty value will be counted as consistent
with the Special Repetition rules of the other apparatus.
Some examples:
• Rybalko in double el grip or Rybalko in mixed grip or Ry-
Code MAG 2021 141

balko one hand grip.
• Endo with 1/1 turn in double el grip or Endo with 1/1 turn
in mixed grip.
• Stalder ½ turn in double el grip or Stalder ½ turn in mixed
grip.
c) Only two Tkatchev or Piatti style flight elements are permitted.
Only two Kovacs style flight elements are permitted. Three
of the same style flight elements are only permitted if two are
directly connected
Example:
Kolmann; Kovacs + Gaylord
Kolmann + Kovacs; Cassina
Tkatchev stretched + Tkatchev; Liuki
7. Regrasping Tkatchev ½ or Yamawaki ½ elements without sufficient
turning and continuing to handstand (or directly connecting to a
release element) will receive no value for the identical element
listed in the code of points without a ½.
8. For an el-grip or Russian giant to be recognized directly after an
Adler or turn to el-grip, the el-grip or Russian giant requires a swing
over the bar in el-grip in order to receive a value.
9. A Zou Li Min executed with insufficient turning (greater than 90°
deviation on first full twist) will not be recognized by the D-jury
and receive a -0.5 deduction by the E-jury. This element may not
be devalued to a Giant Swing Fwd. with one arm in undergrip (B
value).
One arm giant swing fwd. with 1/1 t. to el-grip and 1/1 t. to under-
grip (Zou Li Min, Element I.27) cannot be combined with any other
element for an increase in value. FROM 15
10. The Yamawaki element must be stretched when passing through
a vertical body position over the bar for no deductions. An exces-
sive pike or a poor vertical position over the bar will be deducted
and could also lead to recognition of a B value flight element.
11. Yamawaki ½ will need to have all turning continue in the same
direction for the increase in letter value. If the element turns in two
different directions, the element will not be recognized by the D
jury. This element has the same twisting specification as all other
elements in the Code of Points.MOVE TO 15
11. Flight elements always receive value when two hands regrasp the
bar and a distinct hang phase is shown before the gymnast falls.
If the catch is performed with one arm, the value is given to the
gymnast when two hands have finally regrasped the bar or another
element has been clearly initiated. Flight elements always receive
value if a distinct hang phase is shown before the gymnast falls.
13. A Rybalko to one arm with additional ½ or 1/1 turn. Numerous
variations of these elements have been proposed. The MTC will
not permit any additional turning in order to raise the value of any
Code of Points listed elements performed on one arm for the safety
of all gymnasts. MOVE TO POINT 3
14. Giant swing bwd. with hop 3/2 t. to one arm giant swing (Rybalko
to one arm giant swing) is the same value and box as Rybalko
to undergrip or mixed el-grip (Element I.51).MOVE TO POINT 3
Note: This rule also applies to all Stalder Rybalko type elements.
15. One arm giant swing fwd. with 1/1 t. to el-grip and 1/1 t. to under-
Code MAG 2021 142

grip (Zou Li Min, Element I.27) cannot be combined with any other
element for an increase in value.MOVE TO POINT 9
12. Endo in el-grip thr. hdst. (Element III.93): As long as the hands
are in el-grip during the entry of the legs, a hop out to undergrip,
mixed grip, or overgrip afterward is permitted without a loss of
value. Endo in el-grip through handstand. (Element III.93): For the
recognition of this element the gymnast must start the element in
el-grip handstand and must go over the top of the bar in el-grip at
the end of the element
13. How to determine evaluate el-grip combinations:
An El-grip giant swing (Element I.68) and Giant swing rearways
fwd. (Russian giant, Element I.69) only require going over the top
of the bar in el-grip to receive their listed value. No specific amount
of a giant swing in el-grip is required in order for the element to be
recognized.
Sequence examples:
1. Adler to 50° from handstand, swing in-elgrip through the bottom
and over the top, swing in elgrip through the bottom and hop
out to undergrip= value for Adler (and -0.5 angle deduction) and
B value el-grip giant.
2. Adler to handstand, swing in el-grip through the bottom and over
the top into el-grip Endo, swing through the bottom in el-grip
Endo, swing in el-grip through the bottom and hop out to under-
grip = C value Adler, B value el-grip giant, C value el-grip Endo.
14. Flights elements with ½ turns to mixed el-grip must have more
than 50% of the turn completed upon catching the bar in order to
receive no deduction while continuing to back uprise to handstand.
E-jury deductions of small, medium, large should be applied for
any insufficient turning upon catching the bar.
15. Stoop circle fwd. to straddle cut to hang or sup. (Element
III.103)- Gymnast may enter at any angle from a giant swing or
swing forward.
16. Regarding the performance expectations for the exit from the
Czech giant; A simple stoop exit from dorsal hang is permitted
without an angular deviation deduction, but also does not receive
any value
17. Endo, Stalder, Weiler and Adler Elements
For recognition these elements must continue over the bar in the
intended direction
Code MAG 2021 143

Article 15.3 Specific Deductions for Horizontal Bar
E Jury
Small Medium Large
Error
0.10 0.30 0.50
Legs apart or other poor
execution during jump or lift +
to Horizontal Bar.
Lack of swing or pause in

handstand or elsewhere. + +
Low amplitude on flight

+ +
elements.
Deviation from plane of
≤ 15° >15°
movement.
Layaway on the back swing.
+
Illegal elements with or from

feet on the bar.
+
Bent arms on regrasping

+ +
following flight elements.
Bent knees during swing + +
actions. each time each time
Elements not continuing in
their intended direction. (ap-
plied after element) Needed +
to show the element can
receive value
Any flight element with salto
over the bar without a giant +
swing afterward.
Entry angle deviation +
from handstand in Endos, + + (with recogni-
Stalders, Weilers and Adler. tion)
Code MAG 2021 144

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG I: Longs élans en suspension et rotations - Long hang swings and turns - Grandes vuelos en suspensión y rotaciones
1. Établissement arrière à l’appui renversé. 2. Établissement arrière à l’appui renversé avec 3. 4. 5. 6.
Back uprise to handstand. 1/1 t. aussi a. p. mixte.
Dominación atrás al apoyo invertido. Back uprise to hdst. with 1/1 turn also to mixt.
Domin. at. al apoy. inv. con 1/1 g. también a mixta.
7. Établissement arrière à l’appui renversé. av. ½ t. 8. Élancé en arrière et pirouette à la suspension. 9. Élancé en arrière et pirouette à l’appui. 10. 11. 12.
Back uprise to handstand with ½ turn. Swing bwd. and pirouette to hang. Swing bwd. and pirouette to support.
Dominación atrás al ap. invertido con ½ g. Dominación atrás y pirueta a la suspensión. Dominación atrás y pirueta al apoyo.
13. Grand tour avant. 14. Grand tour avant avec 1/1 tour prise mixte. 15. Grand tour avant avec 1/1 tour en double cub. 16. 17. 18.
Giant swing fwd. Giant swing fwd. with 1/1 turn in mixt grip. Giant swing fwd. with 1/1 turn in double elgrip.
Molino adelante. Molino adelante con 1/1 g. en presa mixta. Molino adelante con 1/1 g. en cubital.
19. Grand tour avant avec ½ t. par l’appui renversé. 20. Grand tour avant sauté (aussi avec ½ tour) 21. Grand tour avant avec 1/1 t. sauté. 22. 23. 24.
Giant swing fwd. with ½ t. thr. hdst. Flying giant swing fwd. or with½ turn. Flying giant swing fwd. with 1/1 t.
Molino adelante con½ g. por el apoyo invertido. Molino adelante con salto o con ½ g. Molino adelante con 1/1 g. de salto.
Code MAG 2021 145

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. Grand tour avant d’un bras prise palmaire (360°). 27. Sur 1 bras, grand tour av. avec 1/1 t. a prise 28. 29. 30.
Giant swing fwd. with one arm in ungr. (360°). cubitale et 1/1 t.
Molino ad. de un brazo presa palmar (360°). On one arm, giant swing fwd. w. 1/1 t. to el-grip
and 1/1 t .
En un brazo, molino ad. con 1/1 g. a presa
cubital y 1/1 g.
(Zou Li Min)
31. Grand tour arrière. 32. Grand tour arrière d’un bras (360°). 33. 34. 35. 36
Giant swing bwd. One arm giant swing bwd. (360°).
Molino atrás. Molino atrás de un brazo (360°).
37. Grand tour arrière avec ½ tour. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42.
Giant swing bwd. with ½ turn.
Molino atrás con ½ g.
43. Grand tour arrière sauté prise palmaire. 44. Grand tour arrière sauté. 45. Grand tour arrière sauté avec 1/1 t. 46. Grand tour arrière sauté avec 2/1 t. 47. 48.
Giant swing bwd. with hop to undergrip. Flying giant swing bwd. Flying giant swing bwd. with 1/1 t. Flying giant swing bwd. with 2/1 t.
Molino atrás salto presa palmar. Molino atrás con salto. Molino atrás con salto con 1/1 g. Molino atrás con salto con 2/1 g.
(Quast)
Code MAG 2021 146

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Grand tour arrière sauté avec ½ t. en pr. cub. 51. Grand tour arrière sauté avec 3/2 t. en prise 52. Grand tour arr. sauté avec 3/2 t. en pr. cub. double. 53. 54.
Giant swing bwd. with hop ½ t. to el-grip. palmaire, prise palmaire - cubitale. Giant swing bwd. with hop 3/2 t. to double el- grip.
Molino atrás con salto con ½ g. en presa cubital. Giant swing bwd. with hop 3/2 t. to undergrip, Molino atrás de salto con .3/2 g. en presa cub.
mixed el-grip.
Molino atrás salto con 3/2 g. en presa palmar, (Rybalko)
presa palmar - cubital.
55. 56. Grand tour arrière avec ½ t. en prise cubitale. 57. 58. 59. 60.
Giant swing bwd. with ½ t. to el-grip.
Molino atrás con ½ g. en presa cubital.
61. 62. Élan en avant sauté en prise cubitale. 63. 64. 65. 66.
Long swing fwd. with hop to el-grip.
Impulso adelante salto a presa cubital.
67. 68. Grant tour en prise cubitale. 69. Grand tour dorsal avant (grand tour russe). 70. Grand tour dorsal arrière (grand tour tchèque). 71. 72.
El-grip giant swing. Giant swing rearways fwd. (Russian giant). Giant swing rw. bwd. (Czech giant swing).
Molino en presa cubital. Molino dorsal adelante (molino Ruso). Molino dorsal atrás (molino checo).
Code MAG 2021 147

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. Grand tour arrière avec dislocation av. en 74. Établissement Steineman avec ½ t. à l’appui. 75. Grand tour cub. avec 1/1 t. par l’app. renvs. pr. mx. 76. Grand tour dorsal arrière (grand tour tchèque) 77. 78.
montant et arrière par l’appui renversé. Steineman uprise w. ½ t. to support. Elgrip giant swg. with 1/1 t. thr. hdst. in mx. gr. avec ½ tour au grand tour avant
Giant swing bwd. with inlocation during swing Steineman con ½ g. al apoyo. Molino cubital con 1/1 g. por el ap. inv. pr. mix. Giant swing rw. bwd. (Czech giant swing) with
and dislocate to hdst. ½ turn to fwd giant swing.
Molino atrás con dislocación adelante subien- Molino dorsal atrás (molino checo) con ½ giro
(Ono)
do por el apoyo invertido. a molino.
79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84.
85. 86. 87. 88. 89. 90.
91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96.
Code MAG 2021 148

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG II: Éléments volants - Flight elements - Sueltas
1. 2. Établissement arrière en pass. les jambes écar- 3. Établissement arrière et poisson écarté avec ½ t. 4. Markelov tendu avec jambes serrées 5. Yamawaki tendu avec ½ t. aux prise palmaire- 6. Établissement arrière et poisson tendu avec 3/2
tées en avant à la suspension dorsale à la suspension. Markelov stretched with legs together. cubitale, élan arrière à l’appui renverse. t. à la suspension.
Back uprise and straddle over to hang rw. Back uprise and strad. hecht with ½ t. to hang. Markelov extendido con piernas juntas. Yamawaki ½ t. stretched to mixed grip into back Back uprise and hecht stretched with 3/2 t. to
Dominación atrás pasando las piernas abiertas Dominación atrás y tigre piernas abiertas con uprise to hdst. hang.
adelante a la suspensión dorsal. ½ g. a la suspensión. Yamawaki ½ g. ext. a presa mixta en agarre Dominación atrás y tigre ext. con 3/2 g. a la susp.
(Markelov) (Yamawaki) por detrás al apoyo invertido. (Walstrom)
(Muñoz - Pozzo)
C
7. 8. 9. Elan en av. et sauté dorsal jamb. éc. ou c. à la susp. 10. Tkatchev tendu. 11. Tkatchev tendu avec ½ t. à prise pal.-cub. élan 12. Tkatchev tendu avec 1/1 t.
Swing fwd. and vault bwd. strad. or piked to hang. Tkatchev stretched. arrière à l’appui renversé. Tkatchev stretched with 1/1 t.
Impulso ad. y salto dorsal p. ab. o carp. a la susp. Tkatchev extendido. Tkatchev stretched with ½ t. to mix el-grip into Tkatchev extendido con 1/1 g.
back uprise to hdst.
(Tkatchev) Tkatchev extendido con ½ g. a presa mixta (Liukin)
dominación atrás al apoyo invertido.
(Moznik)
13. 14. 15. 16. Tkatchev écarté avec ½ t. aux prise mixte. 17. Tkatchev écarté avec ½ t. aux prise cubitale. 18.
Tkatchev straddled with ½ t. to mix el-grip into Tkatchev straddled ½ t. to double elgrip.
back uprise to hdst. Tkatchev con ½ g. a presa cubital.
Tkatchev con ½ giro a presa mixta.
(Lynch) (Kulesza)
Piked (Samiloglu)
19. 20. Établissement arrière et sauté en position carpée 21. 22. Élan circulaire libre en arrière ca. ou éc. ou tour 23. Piatti tendu. 24. Piatti tendu avec ½ t. à prise palmaire-cubitale
avec ½ t. à la suspension. d’appui avec Tkatchev écarté. Piatti stretched. élan arrière à l’appui renversé.
Back uprise and piked vault with ½ t. to hang. Stalder, stoop circle or free hip circle bwd to Piatti extendido. Piatti stretched with ½ t. to mix el-grip into back
Dominación atrás y salto en carpa con ½ g. a Tkatchev straddle. uprise to hdst.
la suspensión. Impulso circ. libre atrás en carpa, piernas Piatti ext. con ½ g. a presa mixta domin. at. al
(Voronin) abiertas o giro de apoyo con Tkatchev p. ab. apoyo inv.
(Piatti) (Kierzkowski)
Code MAG 2021 149

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. 26. Établissement arrière et sauté dorsal avec ¼ t. 27. 28. Piatti carpé. 29. Piatti avec ½ t. à prise palmaire-cubitale élan 30. Piatti tendu avec 1/1 tour.
à la suspension. Piatti piked. arrière à l’appui renversé. Piatti stretched with 1/1 turn.
Back uprise and rear vault with ¼ t. to hang. Piatti en carpa. Piatti with ½ t. to mix el-grip into back up. to hdst. Piatti extendido con 1/1 giro.
Dominación atrás y salto dorsal con ¼ g. a la Piatti con ½ g. a presa mixta dominación atrás al (Suarez)
suspensión. apoyo invertido.
22 G
31. 32. 33. Élancé en arrière et salto av. gr., ca., ou éc. à la 34. Salto avant tendu, aussi de la prise cubitale. 35. 36. Salto avant tendu avec 1/1 t., aussi prise cubi-
suspension, aussi de la prise cubitale. Salto fwd. stretched, also from el-grip. tale.
Swing bwd. and salto fwd. t., p. or strad. to hg. Mortal adelante extendido, también de cubital. Salto fwd. stretched with 1/1 t. also from el grip.
also from el-grip. (Balabanov) Mortal ad. ext. con 1/1 g., también de cubital.
Impulso atrás y mortal adelante agrupado, en (Winkler - Pogorelev)
carpa o p. ab. a la susp., también de cubital.
(Jäger)
37. 38. 39. Grand tour tchèque et saut dorsal jambes 40. Élancé en av. et contre-salto av. éc. à la susp. 41. 42. Salto av. tendu avec 2/1 t., aussi prise cubitale.
écartées à la suspension Swing fwd. and counter salto fwd. strad. to hg. Salto fwd. stretched with 2/1 t. also from el grip.
Czech giant and vault bwd. strad. to hang. Impulso ad. y contrasalto ad. p. ab. a la susp. Mortal ad. ext. con 2/1 g., también de cubital.
Molino Checo y salto dorsal piernas abiertas a
la suspensión. (Xiao Ruizhi)
G
43. 44. 45. Élan en av. et salto arrière écarté avec ½ t. à 46. 47. 48.
la suspension.
Swing fwd. and salto bwd. strad. w. ½ t. to hg.
Lanzarse ad. y mortal atrás con ½ g. a la susp.
(Deltchev)
Code MAG 2021 150

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. 51. Élancé en av. et salto arr. ca. avec ½ t. à la susp. 52. 53. 54. Élancé en av. et salto arr. avec 3/2 t. à la susp.
Swing fwd. and salto bwd. piked w. ½ t. to hang. Swing fwd. and salto bwd. w. 3/2 t. to hang.
Lanzarse ad. y mortal at. carp. con ½ g. a la Lanzarse ad. y mortal atrás con 3/2 t. a la susp.
susp.
(Gienger) (Deff)
(Sapronenko)
55. 56. 57. 58. Salto av. par-dessus la barre gr. ou écarté, aussi 59. 60. Gaylord with ½ t.
de la prise cubitale. Gaylord with ½ t.
Salto fwd, tuck or strad. over the bar, also from el-grip. Gaylord con ½ g.
Mortal ad. por encima de la b. agr. o p. ab., también (Pegan)
desde cubital.
(Gaylord)
61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. Gaylord with 1/1 t.

Gaylord with 1/1 t.
Gaylord con 1/1 g.
(Koudinov)
67. 68. 69. 70. 71.Gaylord carpe. 72. Pegan carpe.

Gaylord piked. Pegan Pike.
Gaylord en carpa. Pegan en carpa.
(Maras)
G
Code MAG 2021 151
A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. 75. Stalder ½ t. et sauté dorsal avec ¼ t. à la susp. 76. Salto arrière ½ t. groupe par-dessus la barre. 77. Salto arrière ½ t. carpe par-dessus la barre. 78.
Stalder ½ t. to rear vault with ¼ t. to hang. Salto bwd. ½ t. tucked over the bar. Salto bwd. ½ t. piked over the bar.
Stalder con ½ g. y salto dorsal con ¼ g. a la susp. Mortal atrás agrupado con ½ g. por encima de Mortal atrás en carpa con ½ g. por encima de
(Jansen) la barra. la barra. (Gaylord 2)
79. 80. 81. 82. Double salto arrière gr. par-dessus la barre. 83. Kovacs avec 1/1 t. 84. Kovacs avec 2/1 t.
Double salto bwd. t. over the bar. Kovacs with 1/1 t. Kovacs with 2/1 t.
Doble mortal atrás agr. por encima de la barra. Kovacs con 1/1 g. Kovacs con 2/1 g.
(Kovacs) (Kolman) (Bretschneider)
85. 86. 87. 88. 89. Kovacs carpe ou tendu. 90. Kovacs tendu ou carpe avec 1/1 tour.
Kovacs piked or stretched. Kovacs stretched or piked with 1/1 turn.
Kovacs en carpa o extendido. Kovacs extendido o en carpa con 1/1 giro.
(Cassina)
(Pineda - piked)
91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. Kovacs tendu avec 2/1 tour.
Kovacs stretched with 2/1 turn.
Kovacs extendido con 2/1 giro.
(Miyachi)
I = 0,9
Code MAG 2021 152

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. 99. 100. 101. 102. Kovacs avec 3/2 t. à prise mixte.
Kovacs with 3/2 t. to mix grip.
Kovacs con 3/2 g. a presa mixta.
(Shaham)
103. 104. 105. 106. 107 108.
109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114
115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120.
Code MAG 2021 153

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
EG III: Éléments près de la barre et éléments Adler - In bar and Adler elements - Elementos cerca de la barra y elementos Adler
1. Bascule d’élan à l’appui renversé ou de la prise 2. Bascule d’élan à l’appui renversé de la prise 3. Bascule d’élan à l’appui renversé de la prise 4. 5. 6.
mixte bascule à l’appui renversé avec ½ t. palmaire ou mixte avec 1/1 t. à la prise mixte. palmaire ou mixte avec 1/1 t. à la prise cubitale.
Kip to hdst. or from mixed grip to hdst w. ½ t. Kip to hdst. in under or mixed grip w. 1/1 t. to Kip to hdst. in under or mixed grip w. 1/1 t. to
Báscula de imp. al apoyo invertido o desde mixed grip. el-grip.
presa mix. al apoyo invertido con ½ giro. Kipe al apoyo invertido en presa palmar o mixta Kipe al apoyo invertido en presa palmar o mixta
con 1/1 a presa mixta. con 1/1 a cubital.
7. 8. De l’appui renversé, tour d’appui av. par l’appui 9. Weiler avec 1/1 tour à prises palmaire - cubitale. 10. Weiler avec 1/1 tour à prises cubitales des 2 11. 12.
renversé. Weiler with 1/1 turn to mixed - grip. mains.
From hdst., free hip circle fwd. thr. hdst. Weiler con 1/1 giro a presa mixta. Weiler with 1/1 turn to double el - grip.
Del apoyo inv., giro de apoyo ad. por el ap. inv. Weiler con 1/1 giro a cubital.
(Weiler)
13. De la suspension ou de l’appui, élan par-des- 14. Weiler avec ½ tour. 15. 16. 17. 18.
sus à l’appui renversé. Weiler with ½ turn.
From hang or from support, free hip circle Weiler con ½ giro
through handstand.
De la suspensión o del apoyo, impulso por
debajo al apoyo invertido.
19. De la suspension ou de l’appui, d’élan par- 20. De la suspension ou de l’appui, d’élan par-des- 21. 22. 23. 24.
dessus à l’appui renversé avec ½ tour. sus à l’appui renversé avec ½ tour, pr. cubitale.
From hang or from support, free hip circle From hang or from support, free hip circle-
through handstand with ½ turn. through handstand with ½ turn to el grip.
De la suspensión o del apoyo, impulso por De la suspensión o del apoyo, impulso por
debajo al ap. invertido con ½ g. debajo al ap. invertido con ½ g. presa cubital.
Code MAG 2021 154

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. De la suspension ou de l’appui, d’élan par- 26. 27. De la suspension ou de l’appui, d’élan par- 28. 29. 30.
dessus sauté à l’appui renversé. dessus sauté à l’appui renversé avec 1/1 tour.
From hang or from support, free hip circle hop From hang or from support, free hip circle hop
to handstand. through handstand with 1/1 turn.
De la suspensión o del apoyo, impulso por De la suspensión o del apoyo, impulso por
debajo saltando al apoyo invertido. debajo saltando al ap. invertido con 1/1 g.
31. 32. Élan circulaire carpé éc. ou carpé libre en av. 33. Endo legs together 34. 35. 36.
par l’appui renversé.
Free circle fwd. straddled or legs together thr. hdst.
Impulso circ. carp. p. ab. o carp. ad. por el ap. inv.
(Endo)
37. 38. Endo avec ½ t. par l’appui renversé. 39. Endo avec 1/1 t. par l’appui renversé en prise 40. Endo avec 1/1 t. par l’appui renversé en pr. cub. 41. 42.
Endo with ½ t. thr. hdst. mixte. Endo with 1/1 t. thr. hdst. in el-grip.
Endo con ½ g. por el apoyo invertido. Endo. with 1/1 t. thr. hdst. in mixt grip. Endo con 1/1 g. por el apoyo invertido en presa
Endo con 1/1 g. por el apoyo invertido en presa cubital.
mixta.
43. 44. Élan circulaire carpé écarté ou carpé libre arrière 45. Stalder sauté avec 1/1 t. par l’appui renversé. 46. Stalder avec 3/2 tour saute par l’appui renversé 47. Stalder avec 3/2 tour saute par l’appui renversé 48.
par l’appui renversé. Stalder with hop 1/1 t. through hdst. prise mixte cubital. prise cub.
Free circle bwd. straddle or legs together thr. Stalder saltado con 1/1 g. por el apoyo invertido. Stalder with hop 3/2 turn through hdst. in mix Stalder with hop 3/2 turn through hdst. in el-grip.
hdst. el-grip. Stalder con 3/2 g. de salto por el apoyo invertido
Impulso circ. carp. p. ab. o carp. atrás por el ap. Stalder con 3/2 g. de salto por el apoyo invertido presa cubital.
invertido. presa mixta cubital.
(Stalder)
Code MAG 2021 155

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Stalder avec ½ tour par l’appui renversé. 51. Stalder avec ½ tour par l’appui renversé pr. 52. 53. 54.
Stalder with ½ turn through hdst. cub.
Stalder con ½ g. por el apoyo invertido. Stalder with ½ turn through hdst. in el-grip.
Stalder con ½ g. por el apoyo inv. presa cubital.
55. 56. Stalder sauté par l’appui renversé. 57. Stalder legs together 58. 59. 60.
Stalder with hop through hdst.
Stalder saltado por el apoyo invertido.
61. 62. 63. Élan circulaire Adler par l’appui renversé. 64. Élan circulaire Adler avec ½ t. par l’appui ren- 65. Élan circulaire Adler avec 1/1 t. par l’appui 66.
Stoop circle rearward fwd. through hdst. versé avec prise dorsal. renversé avec prise palmaire.
(Adler). Adler with ½ t. through hdst. in ovgr. Adler and 1/1 t. through hdst. in ungr.
Adler por el apoyo invertido. Adler con ½ g. por el ap. inv. con presa dorsal. Adler con 1/1 g. por el ap. inv. con presa palmar.
(Fuentes)
67. 68. 69. 70. Élan circulaire Adler avec sauté par l’appui 71. 72.
renversé prise palmaire ou prise dorsal ou prise
mixte.
Adler hop to hdst. in ungr. or ovgr. or mixed grip.
Adler con salto por el apoyo invertido presa
palmar, dorsal o mixta.
Code MAG 2021 156

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
73. 74. 75. 76. Élan circulaire Adler avec 1/1 t. par l’appui 77. 78.
renversé avec prise mixte aussi avec saut.
Adler and 1/1 t. thr. hdst. in mixed grip, also
with hop.
Adler con 1/1 g. por el ap. inv. con pr. mixta,
también con salto.
(Baldauf)
79. Élan. en arrière à la suspension dorsale. 80. De la suspension dorsale, établissement av. à 81. Élan en arrière à la suspension dorsale. 82. 83. 84.
Back toss to dorsal hang. l’appui dorsal. Stoop in and free back toss to dorsal hang.
Impulso atrás a la suspensión dorsal. From dorsal hang, uprise fwd. to support rw. Impulso atrás metiendo piernas ext. a la sus-
De la susp. dorsal, dominación ad. al ap. dorsal. pensión dorsal.
(Steineman)
85. 86. 87. Établissement Steineman avec passé carpé 88. 89. 90.
entre les prises à l’appui renversé.
Steineman uprise w. stoop or to hdst.
Steineman con pase en carpa entre las presas
al apoyo invertido.
(Koste)
91. 92. Établissement Steineman avec passé costal 93. Endo prise cubitale par l’appui renversé. 94. Endo prise cubitale et 1/1 en prise mixte ou 95. 96.
arrière à l’appui ou à la suspension. Endo in el-grip thr. hdst. palmaire.
Steineman uprise w. flank bwd. to sup. or hang. Endo presa cubital por el apoyo invertido. Endo in el-grip and 1/1 t. to mixed grip or under-
Steineman con pase costal atrás al apoyo o la grip.
suspensión. Endo presa cubital y 1/1 g. a presa mixta o
palmar.
Code MAG 2021 157

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
97. 98. 99. 100. Koste ½ tour terminé en prise cubitale. 101. 102.
Koste ½ turn to elgrip.
Koste con ½ giro a cubital.
(Likhovitskiy)
103. Élan circulaire carpé en avant et pass. éc. en 104. Élan circ. carpé en av. et pass. éc. par l’appui 105. Élan circ. carpé en av. et pass. éc. avec ½ t. 106. Carballo avec ½ t. aux prise palmaire -cubitale. 107. Quintero en prise cubitale. 108.
arrière à la suspension ou à l’appui renv. Stoop circle fwd. to straddle cut with ½ t. Carballo with ½ turn to mixed el-grip. Quintero to el-grip.
Stoop circle fwd. to straddle cut to hang or sup. Stoop circle fwd. to straddle cut through hdst. Impulso circular en carpa adelante pasando Carballo con ½ g. a presa palmar - cubital. Quintero en presa cubital.
Impulso circular en carpa ad. pasando piernas Impulso circular en carpa ad. pasando piernas piernas abiertas atrás con ½ g.
abiertas atrás a la suspensión o al apoyo. abiertas al apoyo invertido. (Carballo) (Quintero)
109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114.
115. 116. 117. 119. 120.
Code MAG 2021 158

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
1. Salto avant carpé ou tendu, aussi avec ½ t. 2. Salto avant tendu avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 3. Salto avant tendu avec 2/1 ou 5/2 t. 4. 5. 6. Triple salto av. gr.
Salto fwd. piked or stretched, also with ½ t. Salto fwd. str. with 1/1 or 3/2 t. Salto fwd. str. with 2/1 or 5/2 t. Triple salto fwd. t.
Mortal ad. en carpa o ext., también con ½ g. Mortal ad. ext. con 1/1 o 3/2 g. Mortal adelante extendido con 2/1 o. 5/2 g. Triple mortal ad. agr.
(Rumbutis)
G
7. 8. 9. Double salto av. groupe ou carpé ou avec ½ 10. Double salto av. gr. ou carpé avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 11. Double salto av. gr. ou carpé avec 2/1 ou 5/2 t. 12.
tour. Double salto fwd. t. or p. with 1/1 or 3/2 t. Double salto fwd. t. or p. with 2/1 or 5/2 t.
Double salto fwd. t. or p.or with ½ turn. Doble mortal ad. agrupado, en carpa o con 1/1 Doble mortal adelante agrupado, en carpa o
Doble mortal ad. agr., en carpa o con ½ g. o 3/2 g. con 2/1 o 5/2 g.
13. 14. 15. 16. Double salto av. tendu ou avec ½ t. 17. Double salto av. tendu avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 18.
Double salto fwd. str. or with ½ t. Double salto fwd. str. with 1/1 or 3/2 t.
Doble mortal extendido con ½ g. Doble mortal extendido con 1/1 o 3/2 g.
19. 20. 21. Double salto av. gr. ou carpé ou avec ½ tour 22. Double salto av. groupé ou carpe avec 1/1 ou 23. 24.
par-dessus la barre. 3/2 t. par- dessus la barre.
Double salto fwd. t. or p. or with ½ turn over Dbl. salto fwd. t. or p. w. 1/1 or 3/2 t. over the bar.
the bar. Doble mortal adelante agrupado, en carpa o con
Doble mortal adelante agrupado, en carpa o 1/1 o 3/2 g. por encima de la barra
con ½ g. por encima de la barra.
Code MAG 2021 159

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
25. Salto arr. carpé ou tendu aussi avec ½ ou 1/1 t. 26. Salto arrière tendu avec 3/2 ou 2/1 t. 27. Salto arrière tendu avec 5/2 ou 3/1 t. 28. 29. 30.
Salto bwd. piked or str. also with ½ or 1/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 3/2 or 2/1 t. Salto bwd. str. with 5/2 or 3/1 t.
Mortal at. en carpa o ext. también con ½ o 1/1 g. Mortal atrás extendido con 3/2 o. 2/1 g. Mortal atrás extendido con 5/2 o. 3/1 g.
31. 32. Double salto arrière groupé. 33. Double salto arrière groupé avec 1/1 t. 34. Double salto arrière gr. avec 2/1 t. 35. 36.
Double salto bwd. tuck. Double salto bwd. t. with 1/1 t. Double salto bwd. t. with 2/1 t.
Doble mortal atrás agrupado. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 1/1 g. Doble mortal atrás agrupado con 2/1 g.
(Tsukahara)
37. 38. 39. Double salto arrière tendu. 40. Double salto arrière tendu avec 1/1 t. 41. Double salto arrière tendu avec 2/1 t. 42. Double salto arrière tendu avec 3/1 t.
Double salto bwd. str. Double salto bwd. str. with 1/1 t. Double salto bwd. str. with 2/1 t. Double salto bwd. str. with 3/1 t.
Doble mortal extendido. Doble mortal atrás extendido con 1/1 g. Doble mortal atrás extendido con 2/1 g. Doble mortal atrás extendido con 3/1 g.
(Watanabe) (Fedorchenko)
43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48.Triple salto arriéré gr. ou par-dessus la barre.
Triple salto bwd. t. or over the bar.
Triple mortal at. agr. o por encima de la barra.
(Andrianov)
(Hoffmann)
Code MAG 2021 160

A = 0,1 B = 0,2 C = 0,3 D = 0,4 E = 0,5 F = 0,6 G = 0,7 H = 0,8
49. 50. Double salto arrière gr. par-dessus de la barre. 51. Double salto arrière gr. ou carpé avec 1/1 t. 52. Double salto arrière gr. avec 2/1 t. par- dessus 53. 54. Triple salto arrière carpé.
Double salto bwd. t. over the bar. par- dessus la barre. la barre. Triple salto bwd. p.
Doble mortal atrás agr. por encima de la barra. Dbl. salto bwd. t. with 1/1 t. over the bar. Double salto bwd. t. with 2/1 t. over the bar Triple mortal atrás en carpa.
Doble mortal atrás agr. con 1/1 g. por encima Doble mortal atrás agr. con 2/1 g. por encima (Fardan)
de la barra. de la barra.
G
55. 56. 57. Double salto arrière tendu par-dessus la barre. 58. Double salto arrière tendu avec 1/1 t. par-dessus 59. 60. Triple salto arrière gr. avec 1/1 t.
Double salto bwd. str over the bar. la barre. Triple salto bwd. t. with 1/1 t.
Doble mortal ext. por encima de la barra. Double salto bwd. str. w. 1/1 t. over the bar. Triple mortal agrupado con 1/1 g.
Doble mortal ext. con 1/1 g. por encima de la b.
(Belle)
(Hayden)
G
61. Poisson éc., ou poisson ou poisson avec ½ t. 62. Poisson avec 1/1 ou 3/2 t. 63. 64. Poisson avec 2/1 t. 65. 66.
Hecht strad., hecht or hecht w. ½ t. Hecht w. 1/1 or 3/2 t. Hecht w. 2/1 t.
Tigre p. abiertas, tigre o tigre con ½ g. Tigre con 1/1 o 3/2 g. Tigre con 2/1 g.
67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72.
Code MAG 2021 161

PART IV
PART IV
PARTIE IV PARTE IV
Appendices
Appendices
Annexes Anexos
Appendix A
Additional Explanations & Interpretations
1. The text in the difficulty tables supersedes the illustrations.

2. (See Art. 7.4.m) This rule is interpreted, in part, as follows:
a) Twisting elements on all six apparatus will not be recognized
if they are performed with a 1/4 twist (90°) short of or beyond
the specifications for the intended element
b) Swinging elements on all appropriate apparatus will not be

recognized if they are completed 45° or greater from the per-
fect or the prescribed end position. On the Horizontal Bar this
means, for example, that a free hip circle can be performed
up to 45° past a handstand and still be recognized by the D-
Jury. On the Parallel Bars, for example, a Stützkehre must be
performed to at least 45° above horizontal to be recognized by
the D-Jury. A stretched position is considered piked if at any
time during the element a pike of greater than 45° is shown.
3. (See Section 9.1.1) Being performed with perfection implies also

that elements be performed with the specified body position. The
following definitions will apply.
a) A perfect stretched body position is one in which a line from
the shoulders through the hips to the ankles is straight for
static elements and straight or slightly bent forwards or back-
wards during dynamic elements. If the hip assumes a flexion
of greater than 45° at any time during the element, it will be
considered piked.
b) A perfect piked body position is one in which the knees are

straight and the hips are bent at least 90°. Errors include a
pike of less than 90° from the extended position and/or an
additional bending of the knees. If the knees assume a flexion
of greater than 45° at any time during the element, it will be
considered tucked.
c) A perfect tuck position is one during which the hips are strongly
bent and the bent knees are brought to the chest - a minimum
90° bend in each. Errors include a hip bend of less than 90°
from the extended position and/or a knee bend of less than
90°.
d) A stretched position with a knee flexion of 90° is considered

to be stretched but with a large error. If this occurs during an
element it will not be recognized by the D-jury.
e) A straddled position must be shown with the maximum separa-
tion of the legs that the aesthetic and technical nature of the
element allows.
Code MAG 2021 162

f) Each of the salto positions - tucked, piked, stretched, straddled
- is expected to be demonstrated so distinctly and conspicu-
ously as to leave no doubt about the intent.
g) A regular handstand on all apparatus is one with the body

perfectly aligned and without arch. A wide arm handstand on
Floor Exercise requires the head to be within one hand width
of the floor.
h) Strength holds on all affected apparatus require, depending
on the element, the arms to be perfectly horizontal, and/or the
body to be perfectly horizontal, and/or the legs to be perfectly
horizontal.
i) Certain dynamic elements when poorly performed can be
confused with other elements. Some typical examples include:
i. Twisting elements on all apparatus that over- or under-turn
by more than 90º.
ii. On Pommel Horse; cross support travels which are
oblique by more than 45º versus travels in side support.
iii. On Vault; handspring forward with salto (Group I) versus
¼ turn in preflight and ¼ turn off with salto forward (Group
II).
In all such cases, the gymnast is obligated to demonstrate
the element he wishes to show in a distinct and unmistakable
manner. Failure to do so will always result in a large deduction
from the E-jury and non-recognition by the D-jury (or on Vault,
recognition as the element and Group with the lower value).
j) Exceptions can be made if the correct technical execution of

an element requires a modification of these definitions.
4. (See Section 9.1.4) This, along with Article 5.2.b is a most impor-
tant directive for all judges especially with the stated expectation
that all elements be performed to perfect end positions. The judge
must at all times use his gymnastics knowledge and gymnastics
sense. The following examples may be instructive.
a) It is possible to perform elements such as a Tkatchev to a

handstand on Horizontal Bar but it is not yet a reasonable, nor
perhaps a desirable, expectation. It is reasonable, however,
to expect in all cases that the element be performed with
technique of such excellence that the gymnast has had time
to prepare for the re-grasp, that it occur with straight arms,
and that it permit continuation with a smooth full swing.
b) It is possible to perform a dislocate to handstand from inverted
hang on Rings, but it would certainly be an exception. The
deduction for not completing this element in handstand would
not apply.
c) Some elements have a special purpose or effect and if such
purpose is conspicuous and aesthetic it would be exempt from
the usual amplitude requirements.
d) It is possible to perform a reverse Stützkehre on Parallel Bars
through a handstand but that is essentially a different element
Code MAG 2021 163

(it is listed as such in the Difficulty Tables) and should not
become the regular expectation for a reverse Stützkehre.
e) There exist a small number of elements (bent arm vs. straight

arm press on several apparatus; amplitude on scales on Floor
Exercise; V-sits vs. high V-sits (Manna) on several apparatus;
planche vs. swallow on Rings) where intermediate positions
make recognition for the D-jury and evaluation difficult for
the E-Jury. The gymnast is expected to show his intended
position or performance so distinctly and conspicuously as to
leave no doubt about the intent. Intermediate or non-distinct
positions are always deducted by the E-Jury and may lead to
non-recognition by the D-jury.
5) Parts of the pommel horse.

To assist in the definition of circles and travels in side support or
cross support, the parts of the horse are defined according to the
following diagrams.

counter-clockwise clockwise
Elements in Side Support
Elements in Cross Support
Code MAG 2021 164

Code 2021 Sept 15 Ingles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Code 2021 Sept 15 Ingles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Code 2021 Sept 15 Ingles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Code of Points?

What is the purpose of the Code of Points?

What are the responsibilities of gymnasts according to the Code of Points?

What are the responsibilities of gymnasts according to the Code of Points?

International Gymnastics Federation

2021 CODE OF POINTS

For men’s artistic gymnastics competitions at

In competitions for nations with lower level of gymnastics

The Code of Points is the property of the FIG. Translation and

Code MAG 2021

Illustrations Koichi Endo JPN

Code MAG 2021 2

Article 5.6 - Seating Arrangements

PART II - EVALUATION OF THE EXERCISES

Section 6 - Evaluation of the Competition Exercises

Code MAG 2021 3

PART III - Apparatus

Code MAG 2021 4

2. Standardize the judging of the four phases of FIG official com-

Article 2.1 Rights of gymnasts

Code MAG 2021 5

Article 2.2 Responsibilities of the gymnast

Code MAG 2021 6

Article 2.3 Duties of the gymnast

Code MAG 2021 7

Articles 2.4 Penalties

Code MAG 2021 8

Performing without signal or green

Code MAG 2021 9

Article 2.5 Gymnasts’ Oath

Article 3.1 Rights of the Coaches

Code MAG 2021 10

Number of Coaches Permitted in the Inner Circle:

Article 3.3 Penalties

Behavior of Coach with no direct impact on the result/performance

Code MAG 2021 11

2nd time – 1.00 (from gymnast/team

Other flagrant, undisciplined and – 1.00 (from gymnast/team at

Article 3.4 Inquiries

Article 3.5 Coaches’ Oath

Code MAG 2021 12

Article 4.1 The President of the MTC

Article 4.2 The MTC Members

Code MAG 2021 13

Article 5.1 Responsibilities

Code MAG 2021 14

Article 5.2 Rights

Article 5.3 Composition of the Apparatus Jury

Code MAG 2021 15

9 Judge Panel Minimum 6 Judge Panel

Article 5.4 Function of the Apparatus Jury

Code MAG 2021 16

Article 5.4.2 Functions of the E - Panel

Article 5.4.3 Function of the Reference Judges

Article 5.5 Functions of the Timers, Line Judges and Secretaries

Article 5.5.2 Functions of the Secretaries

Code MAG 2021 17

Article 5.6 Seating Arrangements

Variations in the seating arrangement are possible depending on